Home

VMG8924-B10A User's Guide

Contents

1. QoS Tag Service Provider Selection ADD_NEW SIP DSCP Mark Setting 46 0 63 General RTP DSCP Mark Setting 46 0 63 SIP Service Provider Name changeme Timer Setting SIP Local Port 5060 1025 65535 Expiration Duration 3600 20 65535 second SIP Server Address changeme Register Re send timer 1800 1 65535 second SIP Server Port 5060 1025 65535 Session Expires 180 91 3600 second REGISTER Server Address changeme Min SE 120 90 1800 second REGISTER Server Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Service Domain changeme Phone Key Config less Call Return 668 One Shot Caller Display Call 82 RFC support One Shot Caller Hidden Call 67 Support Locating SIP Server RFC 3263 Call Waiting Enable 418 LI RFC 3262 Require 100rel Call Waiting Disable 41 VoIP IOP Flags WR v Replace dial digit to 23 in SIP messages Internal Call HHHH Remove 5060 and transport udp from request uri in SIP messages Call Transfer 98s Remove the Route header in SIP messages Unconditional Call Forward Enable 228 v Dont send re Invite to the remote party when there are multiple codecs answered in the SDP Unconditional Call Forward Disable 22 No An r Call Forward Enabl 238 Bound Interface Name No Answer Call Forward Enable 23i a NO Ai Call F d Disabl 234 Bound Interface Name OLan any_WaAN Omutti_wan ADSL VDSL ETHWAN pppo3G DEE er otras rors paa Call Forward When Busy Enable 248 Outbound Proxy
2. LINK TAB FUNCTION User Account Use this screen to change user password on the Device Remote MGMT Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services TR 069 Client Use this screen to configure the Device to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server ACS TR 064 Use this screen to enable management via TR 064 on the LAN SNMP Use this screen to configure SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol settings Time Use this screen to change your Device s time and date Email Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender Notification addresses on the Device Log Setting Use this screen to change your Device s log settings Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your device Upgrade Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device s configuration settings or reset the factory default settings Reboot Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off Diagnostic Ping amp Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection You can Traceroute amp use Ping TraceRoute or Nslookup to help you identify problems Nslookup 802 1ag Use this screen to configure CFM Connectivity Fault Management MD maintenance domain and MA maintenance association perform connectivity tests and view test reports OAM Ping Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection VMG8924 B10A U
3. NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH IPSEC TUNNEL User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service AIM TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software TCP UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for instance www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Protocol a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files TCP 21 that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a spec
4. Username Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Email If you select TZO in the Service Provider field enter the user name you used to register for this service Key If you select TZO in the Service Provider field enter the password you used to register for this service Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 176 VMG8924 B10A Users Guide Interface Group 12 1 Overview By default all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Device are in the same group and can communicate with each other Create interface groups to have the Device assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups Each group acts as an independent network on the Device This lets devices connected to an interface group s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface group s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces 12 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Interface Group screens let you create multiple networks on the Device Section 12 2 on page 177 12 2 The Interface Group Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group Alternatively you can have the Device automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses
5. WAN IP This field displays the incoming packet s destination IP address Server IP This is the server s IP address to which the service is forwarded Address Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service Translation This is the first internal port number that identifies a service Start Port VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 157 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Table 56 Networ k Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Translation End This is the last internal port number that identifies a service Port Protocol This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server whether it is TCP UDP or TCP UDP Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule 10 2 1 Add Edit Port Forwarding Click Add new r ule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen Figure 83 Port Forwarding Add Edit Active Service Name WAN Interface WAN IP Trigger Start Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Server IP Address Protocol MAC address of WOL B Note Wake up this target by Wake On Lan WOL ADSL v 192 168 1 TCP v device 1 If Start Port and End
6. LABEL DESCRIPTION Manually Select POWER ON or POWER OFF to turn on off the interface or LED lights Switch On Off Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 14 3 The Auto Switch Off Screen Use this screen to view schedules to turn on or off specific interface s and or all LED lights on the Device To access this screen click Network Setting Power Management Auto Switch Off Figure 112 Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off Add or modify rules B Notes 1 Service can be actived manually at any time 2 After adding or modifying schedule rules you MUST check schedule table above and re apply it Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 82 Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch OffNetwork Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off LABEL DESCRIPTION Add or modify Click this link to create or edit a schedule rules This is the index number of a schedule rule Rule Name This field shows the name of the schedule rule Day This field shows which week days in green the interface s and or LEDs are turned on and the days grayed out they are turned off automatically Time This field shows the time period the interface s and or LEDs are turned on Wireless This field shows whether this schedule applies to the wi
7. Active Profile Common modified Click the Devices tab VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes The following screen displays Click Yes to save the changes in all screens Figure 220 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate redhat config network You have made some changes in your configuration To activate the network device eth0 the changes have to be saved Do you want to continue 7 After the network card restart process is complete make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer locate the if config ethO configuration file where etho is the name of the Ethernet card Open the configuration file with any plain text editor e f you have a dynamic IP address enter dhcp in the BoorPROTO field The following figure shows an example Figure 221 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO EVICE eth0 D ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO dhcp U P T SERCTL no ERDNS yes YPE Ethernet f you have a static IP address enter static in the BooTPROTO field Type IPADDR followed by the IP address in dotted decimal notation and typ
8. 5 Dialogue voice traffic 6 BYE ii 7 OK 1 Asendsa SIP INVITE request to B This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call 2 B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing 3 B sends an OK response after the call is answered 4 Athen sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call 5 Now A and B exchange voice media talk 6 After talking A hangs up and sends a BYE request 7 B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers Usually the SIP UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request to the SIP proxy server Then the proxy server looks up the destination to which the call should be forwarded according to the URI requested by the SIP UAC The request may be forwarded to more than one proxy server before arriving at its destination The response to the request goes to all the proxy servers through which the request passed in reverse sequence Once the session is set up session traffic is sent between the UAs directly bypassing all the proxy servers in between VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice The following figure shows the SIP and session traffic flow between the user agents UA 1 and UA 2 and the proxy servers this example shows two proxy servers PROXY 1 and PROXY 2 Figure 154 SIP Call Through Proxy Server
9. General Route Hardware Device Nickname ethO Activate device when computer starts Allow all users to enable and disable the device Automatically obtain IP address settings with dhcp DHCP Settings Hostname optional 4 Automatically obtain DNS information from provider Statically set IP addresses Manual IP Address Settings Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address OK 3 Cancel f you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain I P address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list f you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway Address fields Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen If you know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 219 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS Y DEDITOS Configuration File Profile Help Sf 6 9 New Edit Copy Delete Devices Hardware DNS Hosts caa You may configure the system s hostname domain name servers and search domain Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network Hostname Primary DNS Secondary DNS Tertiary DNS DNS Search Path
10. Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 161 Eight Subnets SUBNET LAST BROADCAST SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS AppnEss ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 161 Eight Subnets continued SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 162 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NOSNOSTS PER I 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 163 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 2 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19
11. Annex M You can enable Annex M for the Device to use double upstream mode to increase the maximum upstream transfer rate PhyR US Enable or disable PhyR US upstream for upstream transmission to the WAN PhyR US should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise However enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain For PhyR to function the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting gt Network Setting gt Broadband continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PhyR DS Enable or disable PhyR DS downstream for downstream transmission from the WAN PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise However enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain For PhyR to function the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled SRA Enable or disable Seamless Rate Adaption SRA Select Enable to have the Device automatically adjust the connection s data rate according to line conditions without interrupting service Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 5 5 The 802 1x Screen You can view and configure the 802 1X authentication settings in the 802 1x screen Cl
12. Method 2 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the Device VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 23 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device or by checking the device s settings Note You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the Device Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the Device into the client Release The default WPS status is configured Configuratio n Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the Device Generate The PIN Personal Identification Number of the Device is shown here Enter this PIN in the New PIN configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS Number The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push button method Click the Generate New PIN Number button to have the Device create a new PIN Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 6 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM and
13. Table 46 Network Setting gt QoS gt General continued continued LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces including WLAN that you want to allocate using QoS The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed For example set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed This will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth If you leave this field blank the Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces maximum supported connection speed Upstream traffic priority Assigned by Select how the Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows None Disables auto priority mapping and has the Device put packets into the queues according to your classification rules Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority Ethernet Priority Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP Precedence Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header Packet Length Automatically assign priority based on the packet size Smaller packets get higher priority since
14. Click the Delete icon to remove this entry 15 3 1 Add Edit a Service Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall s ACL rule configuration Click Add new service entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the Service screen to display the following screen Figure 118 Service Add Edit Protocol TCP Source Port Any Destination Port Any Add Rule List i J Service Name Service Description Apply Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Service Add Edit Destination Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Protocol Choose the IP protocol TCP UDP ICMP or Other that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number Source These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service If you select Any the service is applied to all ports Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service Protocol This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol Number Enter the protocol number of your customized port Add Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below Rule List Protocol This is
15. Components V ai NetMeeting vi amp Phone Dialer 0 2 MB TM Universal Plug and Play 0 4 MB 3 Virtual Private Networking 0 0 MB E Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 856 3 MB Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Programs Properties window and click Next 5 Restart the computer when prompted Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click Start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Inthe Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Help AO Operator Assisted Dialing sax x 2 y 9 Dial up Preferences Address e Network Connections Network Identification pi Bridge Connections Network Tasks Advanced Settings De UN NER 1 Optional Networking Components 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add
16. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION UPnP Select Enable to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the Device s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator UPnP NAT T Select Enable to allow UPnP enabled applications to automatically configure the Device so that they can communicate through the Device by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP NAT T This is the index number of the UPnP NAT T connection Description This is the description of the UPnP NAT T connection IP Address This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP enabled device External Port This is the external port number that identifies the service Internal Port This is the internal port number that identifies the service Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 7 5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP
17. prefix length Specific IP Address d prefix length IPv4 Specific Service z Y port or port port port or port port ACCEPT wan to LAN r packet s per Minute E 1 512 Apply Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Access Control Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters not including spaces underscores and dashes You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule This field is read only if you are editing the ACL rule Order Select the order of the ACL rule Select Source Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies If you select Specific I P Address Device enter the source IP address in the field below Source IP Enter the source IP address Address Select Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies If you select Specific I P Destination Address enter the destiniation IP address in the field below Device Destination IP Enter the destination IP address Address IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6 Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop down list box The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security gt Firewall gt Service gt Add screen display in this list If
18. Encryption Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA Choices are iud DES a 56 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES a 168 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm EPS NULL no encryption key or algorithm Encryption This field is applicable when you select an Encryption Algorithm y Enter the encryption key which depends on the encryption algorithm DES type a unique key 16 hexadecimal characters long 3DES type a unique key 48 hexadecimal characters long Authentication Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data Choices are MD5 SHA1 Algorithm SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5 but it is also slower Authentication Enter the authentication key which depends on the authentication algorithm id MD5 type a unique key 32 hexadecimal characters long SHAI1 type a unique key 40 hexadecimal characters long SPI Type a unique SPI Security Parameter Index in hexadecimal characters The SPI is used to identify the Device during authentication The Device and remote IPSec router must use the same SPI OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN 20 4 The IPSec VPN Monitor Screen Use this screen to check your VPN tunnel s current status You can also manually trigger a VPN tunnel to the remote network Click Security gt I PSec VP
19. IPv6 Routing Table fe80 64 fe80 64 ff00 8 f100 8 U 256 br Uu 256 br1 Uu 256 br Uu 256 br1 The following ta ble describes the labels in this screen Table 133 System Monitor gt Routing Table LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 IPv6 Routing Table Destination This indicates the destination IPv4 address or IPv6 address and prefix of this route Gateway This indicates the IPv4 address or IPv6 address of the gateway that helps forward this route s traffic Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of the IPv4 route VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 277 Chapter 26 Routing Table 278 Table 133 System Monitor gt Routing Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Flag This indicates the route status U Up The route is up Reject The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail G Gateway The route uses a gateway to forward traffic H Host The target of the route is a host R Reinstate The route is reinstated for dynamic routing D Dynamic redirect The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect M Modified redirect The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost The smaller the number the lower the cost Service This indicate
20. A Are you sure you want to restore factory default settings Figure 188 Reset n Process Message Router is restarting now Please wait You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device Refer to Section 1 6 on page 22 for more information on the RESET button 39 3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off You may need to do this if the Device hangs for example Click Maintenance gt Reboot Click Reboot to have the Device reboot This does not affect the Device s configuration Figure 189 Maintenance gt Reboot System Reboot VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 313 Chapter 39 Configuration VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Diagnostic 40 1 Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscriber s network access In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts IEEE 802 1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management CFM specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults Through discovery and verification of the path CFM can detect analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs 40 1 1 W
21. Interface Status Interface This column displays each interface the Device has Status This field indicates the interface s use status For the DSL interface this field displays Down line down Up line up or connected and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation For the Ethernet WAN and LAN interface this field displays Up when using the interface and NoLink when not using the interface For the WLAN interface this field displays the enabled Active or disabled InActive state of the interface For the 3G USB interface this field displays Up when using the interface and NoDevice when no device is detected in any USB slot Rate For the Ethernet WAN and LAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the DSL interface it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate For the WLAN interface it displays the maximum transmission rate or N A with WLAN disabled For the 3G USB interface this field displays Up when a 3G USB device is installed in a USB slot and NoDevice when no device is detected in any USB slot Registration Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the Device Action If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server the Account Status field displays Registered Click Unregister to delete the SIP account s registration in the SIP server This does not cancel your SIP account but it deletes the mapping betw
22. Use this screen to remotely turn on a device on the network VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table3 Navigation Panel Summary continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device DNS Route Use this screen to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server s Policy Use this screen to configure policy routing on the Device Forwarding RIP Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to exchange routing information with other routers QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing You can also configure the QoS rules and actions Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier Policer Setup Use these screens to configure QoS policers NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world Applications Use this screen to configure servers behind the Device Port Triggering Use this screen to change your Device s port triggering settings DMZ Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen ALG Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Device s address mapping settings Se
23. WAN Interface Select the WAN interface this group uses The group can have up to one PTM interface up to used in the one ATM interface and up to one ETH interface grouping i Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group Grouped LAN Select one or more LAN interfaces Ethernet LAN HPNA or wireless LAN in the Available Interfaces LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group Available LAN Interfaces To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces use the right facing arrow Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDs Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of the hardware or firmware See Section 12 2 2 on page 180 for more information VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 179 Chapter 12 Interface Group Table 74 Interface Group Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This shows the index number of the rule Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically WildCard This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled Support Remove Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the Device Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to exit this scre
24. 21 10 Click Vol P gt Call History gt Call History Incoming Calls The following screen displays Figure 150 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Incoming Calls Refresh Each field is described in the following table Table 118 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Incoming LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the received call list Clear All J Click this button to remove all entries from the received call list This is a read only index number time This is the date and time when the call was made phone port This is the phone port on which you received the call Missed means the call was unanswered phone number This is the SIP number that called you duration This displays how long the call lasted Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the Vol P screens VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit switched telephone network You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP companies provide VoIP service Circuit switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second Kbps in each direction to handle a telephone call Vol P can use advanced voice coding t
25. 9 6 1 Add Edit a QoS Policer Click Add new Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen Figure 79 Policer Setup Add Edit IV Active Name Meter Type Committed Rate Conforming Action Committed Burst Size Non Conforming Action Regulated Classes Member Setting Available Class lest Simple Token Bucket 200 kbps Boo kbyte Selected Class r Class 1 example Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Policer Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to activate this policer Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer Meter Type This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted Each token represents one byte The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size The Single Rate Three Color Marker srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate CIR the Committed Burst Size CBS and the Excess Burst Size EBS The Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR Comm
26. VMG8924 B10A Check the problems VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens If you want to view information about a client click the client s name and Info Click the IP address if you want to change it If you want to change the name or icon of the client click Change name icon Info Parental Control Change nameficon If you prefer to view the status in a list click List View in the Viewing mode selection box You can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh interval Figure 16 Network Map List View Mode Network Map Viewing mode Refresh interval None x lamen cope Connection Type Ethernet FO DevceName IP Address MAC Address 192 168 1 2 00 24 21 7e 20 96 4 3 The Status Screen Use this screen to view the status of the Device Click Status to open this screen Figure 17 Status Screen Host Name Model Number Firmware Version WAN Information LAN Information IPv4 Address IPv4 Subnet Mask DHCP MAC Address 2 4G WLAN Information MAC Address Status SSID Channel Security 802 11 Mode WPS 5G WLAN Information MAC Address Status SSID Channel Security 802 11 Mode WPS Security Firewall Router VMG8924 B10A 1 00 AAKL 0 b2 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server EC 43 F6 44 6C 97 EC 43 F6 44 6C 98 Off ZyXEL446C97 Auto Current 1 Mixed WPA2 P
27. You can configure your wireless network in either the built in Web Configurator or using the WPS button Figure 6 Wireless Access Example ng INTERNE 1 7 1 Using the Wi Fi and WPS Buttons If the wireless network is turned off press the Wi Fi button for one second Once the WiFi 2 4G LED turns green the wireless network is active You can also use the WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the Device and a WPS compatible client by adding one device at a time 22 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device To activate WPS 1 Make sure the PWR SYS LED is on and not blinking 2 Press the WPS button for five seconds and release it 3 Press the WPS button on another WPS enabled device within range of the Device The WiFi 2 4G LED flashes orange while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device 4 Once the connection is successfully made the WiFi 2 4G LED shines green To turn off the wireless network press the Wi Fi button for one to five seconds The WiFi 2 4G LED turns off when the wireless network is off 1 8 Wall mounting Instructions Do the following to hang your Device on a wall 1 Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions Use a sturdy wall 2 Hold the bracket against the wall and mark where to drill the holes 3 Drill the two screw holes in the wall Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located insid
28. Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 76 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing LABEL DESCRIPTION Information Volume This is the volume name the Device gives to an inserted USB device Capacity This is the total available memory size in megabytes on the USB device Used Space This is the memory size in megabytes already used on the USB device Server Configuration File Sharing Select Enable to activate file sharing through the Device Services Host Name Enter the host name on the share Share Directory List Add New Share Click this to create a new share for users to access through the Device Active Select this to activate the share Status This field shows the status of the share The share is not activated J The share is activated and shared to all users The share is activated and only shared to the specified users listed in the Account Management section below VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 13 USB Service Table 76 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing LABEL DESCRIPTION Share Name This field shows the name of a folder that is shared through the Device Share Path This field shows the location of the share in the Device Share This field shows a short description of the share Description Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the share Click the
29. IPv4 Address Enter the LAN IPv4 IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default Subnet Mask Prefix Length Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 factory default Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so IGMP Snooping Status IGMP Mode Select the Enable I GMP Snooping checkbox to allows the Device to passively learn multicast group Select Standard Mode to have the Device forward multicast packets to a port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports Select Blocking Mode to have the Device block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN DHCP Server Sta te Server Address DHCP Select Enable to have the Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the Device Select DHCP Relay to have the Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server DHCP Relay This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 30 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in
30. If you do not select a mail server e mail notifications cannot be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance gt Email Notification screen 3G backup Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e mail notifications that the Device Send Email sends Title VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Send Notification to Email Notifications are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank notifications cannot be sent via e mail Advanced Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings Budget Setup Enable Budget Control Select Enable to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card You can set a limit on the total traffic and or call time The Device takes the actions you specified when a limit is exceeded during the month Time Budget Select this and specify the amount of time in hours that the 3G connection can be used within one month If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control the Device resets the statistics Data Budget Mbytes Select this and specify how much downstream and or upstream data in Mega bytes can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month Select Download Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions
31. Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request For a certification request click Load Signed to import the signed certificate Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use 19 3 1 Create Certificate Request Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the following screen Use this screen to have the Device generate a certification request Figure 128 Create Certificate Request Certificate Name Common Name Organization Name State Province Name Country Region Name Auto Customize US United States Apply Cancel VMG8924 B10
32. Priority Select the priority level from 1 to 7 of this queue The smaller the number the higher the priority level Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested Weight Select the weight from 1 to 8 of this queue If two queues have the same priority level the Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Buffer This field displays Drop Tail DT Drop Tail DT is a simple queue management Management algorithm that allows the Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full Once the buffer is full new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again packets are transmitted out of it Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate in Kbps allowed for traffic on this queue OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 9 5 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add edit or delete QoS classifiers A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming interface For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow
33. Security Firewall This displays the firewall s current security level System Status System Up This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up The Time Device starts up when you plug it in when you restart it Maintenance Reboot or when you reset it Current Date This field displays the current date and time in the Device You can change this in Time Maintenance Time Setting System Resource VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens Table4 Status Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 10096 the Device is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using QoS see Chapter 9 on page 137 Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device s memory is currently used Usually this percentage should not increase much If memory usage does get close to 100 the Device is probably becoming unstable and you should restart the device See Section 39 2 on page 311 or turn off the device unplug the power for a few seconds NAT Session Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device supported NAT sessions are currently being used
34. Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic from the ISP to the Device Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic from the Device to the ISP If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control the Device resets the statistics Data Budget kPackets Select this and specify how much downstream and or upstream data in k Packets can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month Select Download Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic from the ISP to the Device Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic from the Device to the ISP If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control the Device resets the statistics Reset all budget counters on Select the date on which the Device resets the budget every month Select last if you want the Device to reset the budget on the last day of the month Select specific and enter the number of the date you want the Device to reset the budget Reset time and data budget counters Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately The count starts over with the 3G connection s full configured monthly time and data budgets This does not affect the normal monthly budget restart so if you configured the time and data budget counters to reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first
35. 0 9 A Z with no spaces It must contain both letters and numbers and is case sensitive Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Enhanced Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless Multicast unicast traffic Forwarding Max Upstream Bandwidth Max Downstream Bandwidth Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in kilobits per second Kbps Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in kilobits per second Kbps VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 15 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General continued LABEL DESCRIPTION BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled Security Level Security Mode Select Basic WEP for 2 4 GHz frequency ba
36. A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 242 RTS CTS __RTS Range Wireless AP es T Station k L D Stations cannot ACK a d 7 pressi A 7 C hear each other 7 B CTS Range When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify the
37. A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen 16 2 The MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device Click Security gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 122 Security gt MAC Filter MAC Address Filter Enable C Disable settings are invalid when disabled r p 5 O r r B 30 31 Hm m rpm 32 B Note Only devices listed here are granted access to the network VMG8924 B10A User s Guide A i Chapter 16 MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 Security gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function Set This is the index number of the MAC address Allow Select Allow to permit access to the Device MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device If you clear this the MAC Address field for this set clears Host name Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Device MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Device in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click
38. Description Type more information to describe the share optionally VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 187 Chapter 13 USB Service Table 77 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing gt Add new share LABEL DESCRIPTION Access Level Select Public to allow all users on the network to access the shared files Select Security to require users to log in to access shared files Set up user accounts in the Account Management section Apply Click this to save your changes to the Device Back Click this to return to the previous screen 13 2 2 The Add New User Screen Use this screen to create a user account that can access the secured shares on the USB device To access this screen click the Add new user button in the Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing screen Figure 108 Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing gt Add new user Add New User z User Name New Password Retype New Password Each field is described in the following table Table 78 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing gt Add new user LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter a user name You can enter up to 16 characters Only letters and numbers allowed New Password Enter the password used to access the secured share The password must be 5 to 15 characters long Only letters and numbers are allowed The password is case sensitive
39. Enter the first and second DNS Domain Name System server IP address the Device passes to the DHCP clients LAN I Pv6 Mode Setup IPv6 State Select Enable to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the Device LAN IPv6 Address Setup Delegate prefix Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider Random Global ID from WAN or an uplink router Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the Device s LAN IPv6 address ULA Pseudo A unique local address ULA is a unique IPv6 address for use in private networks but not routable in the global I Pv6 Internet Select this to have the Device automatically generate a globally unique address for the LAN IPv6 address The address format is like fdxx xoox XXxx Xxxx 64 ULA IPv6 Address Setup IPv6 Address If you select static IPv6 address enter the IPv6 address prefix that the Device uses for the LAN IPv6 address Prefix Length If you select static IPv6 address enter the IPv6 prefix length that the Device uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits starting from the left in the address compose the network address This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 30 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup
40. Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP 2003 Vista By default Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6 This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP 2003 to enable IPv6 This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto generated IP addresses C gt ipv install Installing Succeeded C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix TP AGAY ES Sie feos x Hae es oe ee een us wr MO AG Subnet Mask ac Se gt ah ee a er a PS 290720950 IP Address fe80 2d0 59ff feb8 103c 4 Default Gateway 10 1 1 254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer Example Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP 1 2 3 Windows XP does not support DHCPv6 If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP Note If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network ignore this section This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer After the installation is co
41. Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the Chapter 10 on page 155 for more information on NAT Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other withou
42. LAN Refresh Interval l 15 seconds Bytes Sent 0 1 507 004 0 0 0 Bytes Received 0 346 525 0 0 0 hide more Data 0 2810 0 0 0 Pee Error 0 0 0 0 0 Drop 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 3126 0 0 0 Mise Error 0 0 0 0 0 Drop 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 129 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface more hide Click more to show more information Click hide more to hide them more Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Sent Packets Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Received Packets Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 271 Chapter 23 Traffic Status 23 4 The NAT Status
43. RIFS Advertisement WPS 2 0 XPress Technology OBSS Coexistence Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 2347 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 Auto Channel Timer 0 min Output Power 10096 v Beacon Interval 100 ms DTIM Interval 1 ms 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n Mixed v RX Chain Power Save Auto v Auto v Enable v Enable w Enable w The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Others LABEL DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS Request To Send CTS Threshold Clear To Send handshake Enter a value between 0 and 2347 Fragmentation Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value between 256 and 2346 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 27 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Others continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Channel Timer If you set the channel to Auto in the Network Setting Wireless General screen specify the interval in minutes for how often the Device scans for the best channel Enter 0 to disable the periodical scan Output Power Set the output power of the Device If there is a high density of APs in an area decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs Select one of the following 2096 40 60 80 or 100 Beacon Inte
44. SA1 FACIE Poley FINS a iss stor cnassd cd ausiss ga don iiiaae aaae ENE ASAAN 134 DORE uinasntosdioidep netiis cus tac EUH ND eb do Le Un d canto e suc ieeessecanncalonenyarcoiemadaatias odd ond m bS 135 85 1 The RIP Seren oix veppqudvine d d pA iil teh ERR RIVER aia uaN RN aia ENR URN 135 Chapter 9 Qualy ot Servie uto 9 e i A ea a a aia ae aie aaiae aaie 137 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Table of Contents cERt 1 Mid TTA 137 ST What You Can Do inthe CHapter issiima anaiona Ue debts danni dae ia 137 9 2 What You Nese to c e 137 23 Ihe Quality o cervice Ge eral ene eic adig Pri epi labra M uA REDDE PORE pata 139 g4 The Ouens SSUP en yo ere reer ret peer mre terre a ieee eer tree rere titer renter rer fereet er rer ererr teeters eet etre 140 SENE TERES XII eee 141 o Ihe Ches SOT SEEE acess tear insite raro kae cuota don DU C Re npa abd xad E Aaaa Ra 142 eR POAC CHS GASE eU UMLET 144 WB meos Police Setup SOFBSI aisi ker pedo dan e c di ba aa A ird rt s Rd rr rege 147 cow PO I WESCE cio MR tr d 148 w7 The COS ucl m 149 DH Technical e E A A EA A E ua PEE PO UO ka paa E A E La RO 150 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT ssssssssssnunsnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnn nnmnnn naaa 155 DER lg aan eteiumaen taeda an tcandeae tedden aoe aa eens ea eee 155 101 1 Whai You Gar Do TII GOES casas pr abo p otia apo pta pb e Pd a o 155 TL2 Woa Eh To KION edet rattwndanataes aAA OE AE EAAS NEA IE A E EAN 155
45. SIP ALG 164 activation 165 SMTP 171 SNMP 171 297 298 agents 297 Get 298 GetNext 298 Manager 297 managers 297 MIB 297 network components 297 Set 298 Trap 298 versions 297 SNMP trap 171 speed dial 247 SPI 196 SrTCM 153 SSID 94 activation 81 MBSSID 97 static route 129 135 303 configuration 63 131 132 175 example 129 static VLAN status 37 firmware version 39 LAN 39 WAN 39 wireless LAN 39 status indicators 20 subnet 349 subnet mask 106 127 350 subnetting 352 supplementary services 258 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 66 SYN attack 196 syslog protocol 265 severity levels 265 system firmware 309 version 39 passwords 25 26 reset 22 status 37 LAN 39 WAN 39 wireless LAN 39 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Index time 299 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI The 45 three way conference 261 262 thresholds data fragment 89 93 RTS CTS 89 93 time 299 ToS 258 TPID 68 TR 064 295 TR 069 293 ACS setup 293 authentication 294 traffic shaping 66 transport mode 228 trTCM 153 tunnel mode 228 Two Rate Three Color Marker see trTCM Type of Service see ToS U unicast 68 Uniform Resource Identifier 250 Universal Plug and Play see UPnP upgrading firmware 309 UPnP 112 cautions 107 example 113 installation 113 NAT traversal 106 USA type call service mode 261 USB features 19 V VAD 256 VID Virtual Circuit VC 65 Virtual Local Area Network
46. Source IP Source Subnet Mask Portocol Source Port Source MAC WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Policy Forwarding Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters not including spaces Source IP Enter the source IP address Source Subnet Enter the source subnet mask address Mask Protocol Select the transport layer protocol TCP or UDP Source Port Enter the source port number Source MAC Enter the source MAC address WAN Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the Broadband screens Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 8 Routing 8 5 RIP Routing Information Protocol RIP RFC 1058 and RFC 1389 allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers 8 5 1 The RIP Screen Click Network Setting Routing RIP to open the RIP screen Figure 72 RIP 1 ptm0 2 2 7 Passive x O B note RIP CANNOT BE CONFIGURED on the WAN interface which has NAT enabled such as PPPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index of the interface in which the RIP
47. Time Hour v Min Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 35 Time Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 144 Maintenance Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Date Time Current Time This field displays the time of your Device Each time you reload this page the Device synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your Device Each time you reload this page the Device synchronizes the date with the time server NTP Time Server First Fifth NTP Select an NTP time server from the drop down list box time server Otherwise select Other and enter the IP address or URL up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Select None if you don t want to configure the time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening State Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time Start rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled D
48. To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box select it and use the button Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 9 7 The QoS Monitor Screen This screen is available only when you set a rate limit for a WAN queue in the Queue Setup screen and the WAN interface is connected Use this screen to monitor the traffic statistics for both the WAN and LAN interfaces To view the Device s QoS packet statistics click Network Setting QoS gt Monitor The screen appears as shown Figure 80 Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor Monitor Refresh Interval 5Seconds Status Interface Monitor 1 WAN 123288 0 2 LAN 441184 0 Queue Monitor 1 DefaultQueue 8 0 2 VoiceQueue 0 0 3 Priority3 122544 0 4 Priority4 0 0 5 Priority5 728 0 6 LANQueue 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the Device to update this screen Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics Interface Monitor This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the interface on the Device Pass Rate This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully Drop Rate This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped Queue
49. Wake by Address IP Address MAC Address Manual The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Wake on Lan LABEL DESCRIPTION Wake by Select Manual and enter the IP address or MAC address of the device to turn it on remotely Address The drop down list also lists the IP addresses that can be found in the Device s ARP table Select an IP address and it will then automatically update the IP address and MAC address in the following fields IP Address Enter the I Pv4 IP address of the device to turn it on MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the device to turn it on A MAC address consists of six hexadecimal character pairs Wake up Click this to send a wake up packet to wake up the specified device VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 12 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 7 12 1 LANs WANs and the Device The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 64 LAN and WAN IP Addresses 7 12 2 DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a serve
50. You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications Click Network Setting QoS Class Setup to open the following screen Figure 76 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup Add new Classifier The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the classifier is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active Class Name This is the name of the classifier Classification This shows criteria specified in this classifier for example the interface from which Criteria traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier E VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 49 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier 802 1P Mark This is the IEEE 802 1p priority level assigned to traffic
51. answered in the SDP Do not send a re Invite packet to the remote party when the remote party answers that it can support multiple codecs Bound Interface Name VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Table 113 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bound Interface Name If you select LAN or Any WAN the Device automatically activates the VoIP service when any LAN or WAN connection is up If you select Multi WAN you also need to select two or more pre configured WAN interfaces The VoIP service is activated only when one of the selected WAN connections is up Outbound Proxy Outbound Proxy Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls This allows the Device to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the Device to keep it from re translating the IP address since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server Outbound Enter the SIP outbound proxy server s listening port if your VoIP service provider gave you Proxy Port one Otherwise keep the default value RTP Port Range Start Port Enter the listening port number s for RTP traffic if your VolP service provider gave you this ERES information Otherwise keep
52. area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 378 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 2 596 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 596 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range
53. bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR Sustainable Cell Rate The Sustainable Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 9 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit ADSL over ATM Bridge Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION QoS Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 5 3 The 3G Backup Screen The USB ports at the left side panel of the Device allow you to attach a 3G dongle to wirelessly connect to a 3G network for Internet access You can have the Device use the 3G WAN connection as a backup Disconnect the DSL a
54. the time and data budget counters will still reset on the second Actions before over budget Specify the actions the Device takes before the time or data limit exceeds Enable 96 of time budget data budget Mbytes data budget kPackets Select Enable and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control the Device resets the statistics Actions when over budget Specify the actions the Device takes when the time or data limit is exceeded Current 3G Select Keep to maintain an existing 3G connection or Drop to disconnect it connection Actions Enable Email Select this to enable the e mail notification function The Device will e mail you a Notification notification when there over budget occurs VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mail Server Over Budget Email Title Select a mail server for the e mail address specified below If you do not select a mail server e mail notifications cannot be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance gt Email Notification screen Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e mail notifications that the Device sends Send Notification to Email Notifications are sent to the e mail address specified in
55. utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65 536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification This may cause systems to crash hang or reboot SPI Stateful Packet Inspection SPI tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context For example traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 15 2 The Firewall Screen Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Device Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply Click Security gt Firewall to display the General screen Figure 116 Security gt Firewall gt General Firewall B Note 1 LAN to WAN Allow access to all internet services 2 WAN to LAN Allow access from other computers on the internet 3 When the security level is set to High access to the following services is allowed Telnet FTP HTTP HTTPS DNS IMAP POP3 and SMTP Enable Disable Medium A Recommended DJ B b v LAN to WAN WAN to LAN x Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Firewall Select Enable to activate the firewall feature on the Device Easy Select Easy to allo
56. which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station System Name Enter the SNMP system name System Location Enter the SNMP system location System Contact Enter the SNMP system contact Trap Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to Apply Click this to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Time Settings 35 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings such as system time password name the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval 35 2 The Time Screen To change your Device s time and date click Maintenance gt Time The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the Device s time based on your local time zone Figure 175 Maintenance gt Time Current Date Time Current Time 18 57 43 Current Date 01 Jan 2013 NTP Time Server First NTP time server pool ntp org v Second NTP time server time nist gov v Third NTP time server ntp1 tummy com v Fourth NTP time server None v Fifth NTP time server None v Time Zone Time zone offset GMT 05 00 Eastern Time v Daylight Saving State iyi Enable O Disable Start rule Day OlDay lin Olorder w Week v in Month Month v Time Hour Min v End rule Day O Day v in Olorder w Week v in Month Month v
57. 10 on page 124 Use the Wake on Lan screen to remotely turn on a device on the network Section 7 11 on page 125 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 1 2 What You Need To Know 7 1 2 1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks DHCP A DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server can assign your Device an IP address subnet mask DNS and other routing information when it s turned on DNS DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it RADVD Router Advertisement Daemon When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation RS request to discover the available routers RADVD with Router Advertisement RA messages in response to the request It specifies the minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts RA messages containing the address prefix IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address 7 1 2 2 About UPnP
58. 168 1 35 to a VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 81 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 Bee NDB het IP Address assigned by ISP C 192 168 1 3 D 192 168 1 36 Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding to open the following screen See Appendix F on page 389 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Figure 82 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding maa RAM m el Mite WAN Inte WANIP Se ver NR ger E dPot Ti ranslation 7 iiem Modify 1 i example VDSL 202 130 192 168 21 21 21 21 TCP 2i B Note The TCP port 30005 is reserved for TRO69 connection request port The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 56 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this to add a new rule This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active Click the bulb to enable disable this rule Service Name This shows the service s name WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded
59. 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 355 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the Device Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your Device that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other d
60. Account Selection ADD_NEW Caution SIP Service Provider Association If you enable Uncondiional Forward Busy Forward and No Answer will be ignored SIP Account Associated with SemiceProvider 1 ve LI LJ Enable Do Not Disturb General Enable sip Account Warning SIP Account Number changeme tem you will not get indication when somebody call you Authentication Clenabie anonymous Call Block Username Password C Enable Call Completion on Bus Subscriber CCBS Apply To Phone 7 Phone 1 7 Phone 2 hone Phone 2 Notice M you enable CCBS activate this feature by pressing phone key S after attempting a call on busy Caution Mf both SIP accounts apply to the same phone the SIP account priority for that phone is SIPO SIP1 UNM Message Waiting Indication 120 86400 Second URL Type Hot Line Warm Line Enable URL Type SIP w varm Line Hot Line Voice Features Hot Line Warm Line number Primary Compression Type G7Ma v Wer Line Timer s O0j amp econd Secondary Compression Type G 726 32 i C Enable Missed Call Email Notification Third Compression Type Giu v Mali Server Speaking Volume Control 0 LA Send Notificaton to Email Listening Volume Contre 0 v Missed Call Email Tite v Enable G 168 Echo Cancellation Notice CJ Enable VAD Voice Active Detector Please configure mail server in Advanced gt Email Notification page and select me mail server tor this feature Call Features 5 ay Mec v Send Caller ID Cl eanty Media IVR Play Index Cl
61. Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 17 Parental Control 17 1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL You can also define time periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user 17 2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control view the parental control rules and schedules Click Security gt Parental Control to open the following screen Figure 123 Security gt Parental Control General Parental Control C Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Parental Control Profile PCP Add new PCP 1 Max PC twpci3774 02 00 DEHARI 22 00 24 00 Configured Configured Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 92 Security gt Parental Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Select Enable to activate parental control Control Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new parental control rule This shows the index number of the rule Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active PCP Name This shows the name of the rule Home Network This shows the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this rule
62. B10A User s Guide Broadband 5 1 Overview This chapter discusses the Device s Broadband screens Use these screens to configure your Device for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 18 LAN and WAN INTERNEJ eD 3G third generation standards for the sending and receiving of voice video and data in a mobile environment You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the Device to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails Figure 19 3G WAN Connection 5 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen to view remove or add a WAN interface You can also configure the WAN settings on the Device for Internet access Section 5 2 on page 47 Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection Section 5 3 on page 57 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL Annex M Annex J and DSL PhyR functions Section 5 4 on page 61 Use the 802 1x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802 1X settings on the Device Section 5 5 on page 62 Use the Wan Status screen to view a WAN interface s historical traffic transmis
63. Certificates Replace PrivateKey Certificate file in PEM format Private Key is protected by a password Import Certificate Create Certificate Request test CNzcc5d4e VMG8924 B10A S090Y 2 4 W VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 2n Chapter 19 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Private Key is protected by a password Select the checkbox and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the Device The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters not including spaces Browse Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the Device Create Certificate Request Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the Device generate a certification request Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information
64. DESCRIPTION Add new account Click this to configure a SIP account This is the index number of the entry Active This shows whether the SIP account is activated or not A yellow bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated A gray bulb signifies that this SIP account is not activated SIP Account This shows the name of the SIP account Service Provider This shows the name of the SIP service provider Account No This shows the SIP number Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP account from the Device 21 3 1 The SIP Account Add Edit Screen Use this screen to configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port To access this screen click the Add new account button or click the Edit icon of an entry in the VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account screen VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Note Click more to see all the fields in the screen You don t necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account Click less to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature Figure 143 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit SIP Account Selection If you enable Call Wai No Answer Time fing Busy Forwa rd will be ignored ClEnable Unconditional Forward To Number Cl Enabie Busy Forward To Number C Enable No Answer Forward To Number Expiration Time SIP
65. DESCRIPTION Name This displays the name of the rule Src IP This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any Dst IP This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any Service This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic to which this rule applies Action This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets DROP discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an I CMP destination unreachable message to the sender RE ECT or allows the passage of packets ACCEPT Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule Enter the number in the field 15 4 1 Add Edit an ACL Rule Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control screen The following screen displays Figure 120 Access Control Add Edit Fitter Name Order Select Source Device Source IP address Destination IP address IP Type Select Service Protocol Custom Source Port Policy Direction Enable Rate Limit Scheduler Rules Select Destination Device Custom Destination Port In specific IP Address
66. Device VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table3 Navigation Panel Summary continued Certificates Local Certificates LINK TAB FUNCTION Parental Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL Control Scheduler Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured Rules restriction such as parental control is enforced Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests Security Log Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs IPSec VPN Setup Use this screen to add or edit VPN policies Monitor Use this screen to view the status of all IPSec VPN tunnels You can also manually initiate a tunnel in this screen VoIP SIP SIP Account Use this screen to set up information about your SIP account and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device SIP Service Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device s Voice over IP Provider settings Phone Use this screen to select your location and a call service mode Call Rule Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often Call History Call History Use this screen to view a call history list Summary Call History Use this screen to view detailed information for each outgoing call Outgoing you made Call History Use this
67. Device is an individual SIP User Agent UA To provide voice service it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents as well as its current IP address for the routing of incoming SIP requests After successful registration the SIP server knows that the users identified by their dedicated SIP URIs are represented by the UA and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client UAC running in the VoIP gateway the Device The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message as well as the relevant user and authorization data A SIP registration has a limited lifespan The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan If it does not do so the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar s database and the connection broken The Device attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled the Device attempts to register the port immediately Authorization Requirements SIP registrations and subsequent SIP requests require a username and password for authorization These credentials are validated via a challenge response system using the HTTP
68. ENERE 113 7 6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example 5 cerise end rents imt tertia er prenda en Lr ida na 116 g WmeAddsans Subnet SPESE isses tuae nia ea sad e EY aa via Hu eR a ERO ad VO GR DU 122 2 9 Ihe SUB Vendor ID Groo kk ot a ER FH RAE E PEE T n eR OE PIA RENE PEIdURREE ULT Qua EE EPA HIR EP MEER E PP RI Ie n gaRES 123 L8 Thes EG met PORE SUPBED aeiaai inr tab a aub rHi qa au Mc ieisquE chris qum res mr FAA gu MMC PiQ UM E P UPNN CES 123 TU ThE LAN VILAINE SOIBBE uai nidi eea a aFkaa dai dhaixa aaa duritia sk OS dut bus ei a ain uua 124 1 The Wake an LAN Saree ciceicsaicssdedantvisceiadcnssetadaniesibeleaisteaaiadantvosdadediviadaiadantaaadacutetaoelaitioatacdinne 125 AIS ooo se Re tsiiclicli lh ae eee nner rrr TI LLL TT SII eer rer erate 126 7 12 1 LANs WANS arid the Device 4 secre erra ratae enn nana anna au pea RicR ra Rem a Kei da 126 Pb AP c r c 126 7 12 3 DNS Server AUSSER decedere as ag RC o ER ab EE upbeGER Ca ERG o RR and a 126 PIA LAN ad M o tener er peters eaa etree reece re 127 Chapter 8 Ci i A E E E 129 NEC CDI sraa a S NS 129 ga Ihe RONNI SEEI ina anaras iA DA AAND as ONE don a Aa A iana 130 SEM uice eec FOUE at Pere eReme te et Sapte eny nner reer ee Cen errr rte rect yee ea 131 Sa TEDN Roue er BB ca epo CURRERE LR ED RR UA VERAT n REL SORDIDE HUN RU 132 8 3 1 Ihe DNS Route Add Screen a iteden a ettet tI LI EPA QURLI SEPVY CHER VEA TERI IA VYVOGIR TE VEN CDL o EU PE ERAK ER 132 Mec Haenel EM 133
69. Ea Aaa a a Ea 25 e ON i E E n e 25 2 1 PCS SI the Web STI ON css cs s an Susteren sida Dra dora taa iE debi ddnde d SOREA 25 zo Wep CONTIN LOU a R 27 Ae EE E E E AT daa O A O E A A A N 27 oe AND ANOO Met 28 2 209 Navigation PANG e 29 Chapter 3 eE EE E PE T A E E A UN NEA RASA RR TIR O N 33 CBS C2 RET a I T oor 33 CESAR T E Word c per M dd Part Il Technical HefereriGe esi saeenaeusaba tieu ph ka basi tta EM oo P rrRD e ada iN pP bou sese M DAE 35 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 5 Table of Contents Chapter 4 Network Map and Status SCreeng m 37 AT Meech ig a ck k aa wg onda ae hw E Fast x UR a Ada ga thea Ei df Aa TG GIR dri eEwe UR 37 2 3 Ihe IE TO iss cna Ss coh xr M dan KERN KE dan pur KE RUDI ER TRU AE ERRARE S NM Dk FX DURS ARR a aV LCD ERR 38 Chapter 5 BO AO DANG sciscisiicinnisinnisi siiiieiici Gnesi eG REI NIGMN NaS 43 VNESS EI ceo Sacha se ta LU E UE 43 2 What You Gan Do is Ghee aisina an na aerial R etnies 43 5 1 2 What You Need TD KNOW Lasso iairdadi seasaradentsnnlassencecbadanntenaededuel a SED 44 SLS Boe YOU Begi ornica 47 52 The Broadband DODGE inoin enaann naaa a aaa aa aa X se aKa aA aa X ame DM Ka EPA RURK Kaa KAE EaR 47 521 Add Edit lnemet Gonbiclol nairean a eeo Ee dte ERU 49 Ed Ihe BK SOE ai prora minis eo pn RN ARR E E a c dan pn 57 Sa The Advanced SOIN dauid
70. Flash 2 1 Switch back and forth between two calls 2 Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call 3 Separate the current three way conference call into two individual calls one is on line the other is on hold Flash 3 Create three way conference connection Flash 98 Transfer the call to another phone European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to a telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Take one of the following actions Reject the second call Press the flash key and then press 0 Disconnect the first call and answer the second call Either press the flash key and press 1 or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings Put the first call on hold and answer the second call Press the flash key
71. General Wireless Network Setup Band 5GHz Wireless Enable Disabled settings are invalid when disabled Channel Auto Current 48 less Bandwidth 80MHz Control Sideband Lower Passphrase Type None Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID AAAAAA Max clients 32 L Hide SSID v Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Max Upstream Bandwidth Kbps Max Downstream Bandwidth Kbps Notes 1 Max Upstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of this SSID to WAN 2 Max Downstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of WAN to this SSID 3Jf Max Upstream Downstream Bandwidth is empty the CPE sets the value automatically BSSID EC 43 F6 44 6C 99 E mail notification when the wireless guest visit v Enable Email Notification Mail Server a Email Title Send Notification to Email Security Level No Security XJ A v v v The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 15 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field Band This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using 2 4 GHZ is the frequency used by IEEE 802 11b g n wireless clients 5 GHz networks use higher frequencies with less interfere
72. I Pv4 Mode to IPv6 Only you can enable Dual Stack Lite to use IPv4 computers and services The Device tunnels IPv4 packets inside I Pv6 encapsulation packets to the ISP s Address Family Transition Router AFTR in the graphic to connect to the IPv4 Internet The local network can also use IPv6 services The Device uses it s configured IPv6 WAN IP to route IPv6 traffic to the IPv6 nternet Figure 21 Dual Stack Lite LAN WAN IPv6 Pv6 IPv4 Pv4 in IPv6 L ISP IPv6 IPv6 Internet IPv6 1Pv4 ss CY m IPv4 Internet 5 1 3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address Get this information from your ISP 5 2 The Broadband Screen Use this screen to change your Device s Internet access settings Click Network Setting gt Broadband from the menu The summary table shows you the configured WAN services connections on the Device Figure 22 Network Setting gt Broadband Add New WAN Interface 1 ADSL ATM Routing IPoE N A N A Y Y Y N N 4 2 VDSL PTM Routing IPoE N A N A Y Y Y N N a 3 ETHW Ethernet Routing IPoE N A N A Y Y Y N N 4 M VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Network Setting gt Broadband LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New WAN Click this button to create a new connection Interface This is the index numb
73. IP networks This provides better quality but it may have inter operability problems The peer devices must also use T 38 QoS Tag SIP DSCP Mark Setting Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for SIP message transmissions The Device creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to SIP traffic that it transmits RTP DSCP Mark Setting Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for RTP voice transmissions The Device creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to RTP traffic that it transmits Timer Setting Expiration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register server Duration before it is deleted The Device automatically tries to re register your SIP account when one half of this time has passed The SIP register server might have a different expiration Register Re Enter the number of seconds the Device waits before it tries again to register the SIP send timer account if the first try failed or if there is no response Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the Device lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session Min SE Enter the minimum number of seconds the Device lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions T
74. If you select this checkbox the trusted CA will be used for 802 1x authentication The CA for 802 1x selected trusted CA will be displayed in the Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x Authentication Edit screen Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the Device OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 217 Chapter 19 Certificates VMG8924 B10A User s Guide VPN 20 1 Overview A virtual private network VPN provides secure communications over the the Internet Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a standards based VPN that provides confidentiality data integrity and authentication This chapter shows you how to configure the Device s VPN settings 20 2 The IPSec VPN General Screen Use this screen to view and manage your VPN tunnel policies The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator Figure 134 IPSec Fields Summary eee eH HK Kee Kee eee H HHH bj Local Network Remote Network VPN Tunnel Mes i cmn mms m mai cm m nmi ee ee ew m ee ee Click Security gt I PSec VPN to open this screen as shown next Figure 135 Security gt IPSec VPN 1 Enable new connection 1 1 1 1 192 168 1 0 192 168 2 0 2 TN B Note IPSec tunnels follow the Firewall Security Level You can add Firewall ACL Ru
75. Me Network Configuration Network 2 LPR for TCP IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI Tx NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Y TCPAIP gt 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX 3C905B VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 327 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect Configuring 1 In the Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab f your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setti
76. Monitor This is the index number of the entry VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 53 Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This shows the name of the queue Pass Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully Drop Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped 9 8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter IEEE 802 1Q Tag The IEEE 802 1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges A VLAN tag includes the 12 bit VLAN ID and 3 bit user priority The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network IEEE 802 1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Table 54 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations i
77. Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue Figure 208 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center T qe Network and Internet Network Connection Edit View Tools Advanced Help By Organize v m Views v Disable this network device Status LAN or High Sesec Internet 11 Name levice Mame Connectivity Networ Toca Collapse group Left Arrow A me Tres Ne ture x d Tie Expand all groups Collapse all groups Disable Status Diagnose Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 337 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and click Properties Agura 209 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties m Q Local Ares Connection Properties Networking king Connect using This connection uses the following items La Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection vi o Client for Microsoft Networks vi JB Network Monitor3 Driver eds File and dia sates for MIS Networks Mapper 1 0 Driver M Link ee Topology Discover Responder Description across diverse interconnected networks Install Uninstall Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication nS Cancel 7 The Intern
78. OCTET SATEET IDE 4TH OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 154 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST 2ND 3RD Rat ee IDECIMAE OCTET OCTET OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 113111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size Notation The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network
79. OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 215 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu lS Grab File Edit Capt About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software System Preferences Doc Location 2 Click Network in the icon bar Select Automatic from the Location list VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list Figure 216 Macintosh OS X Network 6 0 Network m oO a Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic Show Built in Ethernet m AppleTalk Proxies Configure Using DHCP Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your Device and restart your computer if p
80. Pv6 DNS Server First The Device forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server first and then the IPv4 DNS server Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives e Pv4 DNS Server First The Device forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server first and then the IPv6 DNS server Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Use this screen to change your Device s static DHCP settings Click Network Setting Home Networking gt Static DHCP to open the following screen Figure 56 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP Add new static lease 00 24 21 7E 20 96 192 168 1 to The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new static Click this to add a new static DHCP entry lease This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whe
81. Retype New Retype the password that you entered above Password Apply Click this to save your changes to the Device Back Click this to return to the previous screen 13 3 The Media Server Screen The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video music and photos from the USB storage device connected to your Device without having to copy them to another computer The Device can function as a DLNA compliant media server The Device streams files to DLNA compliant VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 13 USB Service media clients like Windows Media Player The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network The Device media server enables you to Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the Device Use hardware based media clients like the DMA 2500 to play the files Note Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares No user name and password or other form of security is used The media server is enabled by default with the video photo and music shares published To change your Device s media server settings click Network Setting USB Service Media Server The screen appears as shown Figure 109 Network Setting gt USB Service gt Media Server Media Server Enable Disable Interface Default v Med
82. SSID should be the same in both WPA PSK or WPA PSK2 security modes VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Bridge Setup AP Mode Select the operating mode for your Device Access Point The Device functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously Wireless Bridge The Device acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs In this mode clients cannot connect to the Device wirelessly Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device s MAC address manually in the table below Select Disable to turn off WDS Remote Bridge MAC Address You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under Modify This is the index number of the entry MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the peer device You can connect to up to 4 peer devices Modify Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Click the Delete icon to remove this entry Scan Click the Scan icon to search and display the available APs within range Apply Click Apply to save your c
83. See VLAN VLAN 67 Introduction 67 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLAN ID 68 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 68 voice activity detection 256 voice coding 256 VoIP 250 peer to peer calls 247 VoIP status 273 W WAN status 39 Wide Area Network see WAN 43 warning wall mounting 23 warranty note 395 WDS 87 97 compatibility 87 example 97 web configurator 25 login 25 passwords 25 26 WEP 95 WEP Encryption 76 78 WEP encryption 76 WEP key 76 Wi Fi Protected Access 375 wireless client WPA supplicants 376 Wireless Distribution System see WDS wireless LAN 71 92 authentication 93 95 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Index BSS 96 WPA PSK 95 375 example 96 application example 377 channel 93 WPS 98 100 encryption 95 example 101 example 92 limitations 103 fragmentation threshold 89 93 PIN 99 limitations 96 example 100 MAC address filter 84 94 push button 22 98 MBSSID 97 preamble 90 93 RADIUS server 95 RTS CTS threshold 89 93 security 93 SSID 94 activation 81 status 39 WDS 87 97 compatibility 87 example 97 WEP 95 WPA 95 WPA PSK 95 WPS 98 100 example 101 limitations 103 PIN 99 push button 22 98 wireless security 371 wizard setup Internet 33 WLAN interference 369 security parameters 378 WPA 95 375 key caching 376 pre authentication 376 user authentication 376 vs WPA PSK 375 wireless client supplicant 376 with RADIUS application example 376 WPA
84. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 125 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 0 Emergency The system is unusable 1 Alert Action must be taken immediately 2 Critical The system condition is critical 3 Error There is an error condition on the system 4 Warning There is a warning condition on the system VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 22 Log Table 125 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 5 Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system 6 Informational The syslog contains an informational message 7 Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 22 2 The System Log Screen Use the Sys
85. TCP ACK F Exclude Step3 Packet modification The content of the packet can be modified by applying the following settings DSCP Mark Unchange 0 63 802 1P Mark VLAN ID Unchange z 0 4094 Step4 Policy Forwarding This module can route or bridge packets to certain interface according to the class settings Forward To Interface unchange Step5 Outgoing queue selection Outgoing queue decide the priority of the traffic and how traffic should be shaped in the WAN inteface Choose None if you dont wantto apply outgoing queue To Queue Index DefaultQueue z VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Class Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable this classifier Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters not including spaces Classification Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list From Interface If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface select an interface from the From I nterface drop down list box Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the mat
86. Tasks ocal Area Connection Create a new nabled connection Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte Set up a home or small Disable office network Status Disable this network device Repair Ww Repair this connection Bridge Connections mij Rename this connection view status of this connection Change settings of this connection Create Shortcut VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Select I nternet Protocol TCP I P under the General tab in Win XP and then click Properties Figure 200 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties l Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using E Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items E Client for Microsoft Networks ivi M Internet Protocol TCP IP Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP f you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically f you have a static IP address click Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Sett
87. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials If you did not select Generate password automatically you can manually type a pre shared key from 8 to 64 case sensitive keyboard characters more less Click more to show more fields in this section Click less to hide them WPA PSK This field appears when you choose WPA PSK2 as the Security Mode Compatible Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA PSK security mode to connect to your Device The Device supports WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK simultaneously VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 18 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Encryption Select the encryption type TKIP AES or TKI P AES for data encryption Select TKI P if your wireless clients can all use TKIP Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES Select TKI P AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group Update Timer key out to all clients 6 2 4 WPA 2 Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the sec
88. Type nactive Test the connection to another Maintenance End Point MEP Loopback Message LBM Test the connection to another Maintenance End Point MEP Linktrace Message LTM Set MD Level Send Loopback Send Linktrace The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 151 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 802 1ag LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management Select a level 0 7 under which you want to create an MA Domain MD Level Destination Enter the target device s MAC address to which the Device performs a CFM loopback test MAC Address 802 1Q VLAN Type a VLAN ID 0 4095 for this MA ID VDSL Traffic This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated Type Loopback This shows how many Loop Back Messages LBMs are sent and if there is any inorder or Message LBM outorder Loop Back Response LBR received from a remote MEP Linktrace This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response LTR Message LTM Set MD Level Click this button to configure the MD Maintenance Domain level Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM Loop Back Message to a specified remote end point Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs Link Trace Messages to a specified remote end point VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 317 Chapt
89. WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM The following screen displays Figure 42 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM WMM WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery APSD Enable Disable Enable Disable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM LABEL DESCRIPTION WMM Select On to have the Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly WMM Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices especially useful for Automatic small devices that are running multimedia applications The Device goes to sleep mode to Power Save save power when it is not transmitting data The AP buffers the packets sent to the Device Delivery until the Device wakes up The Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data Note Note This works only if the wireless device to which the Device is connected also supports this feature VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 24 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously save
90. address specified below If you select None here e mail notifications will not be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Email Notification screen Send Notifications are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is Aon calon to left blank notifications will not be sent via e mail Missed Call Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e mail notifications that Email Title the Device sends Early Media Select this option if you want people to hear a customized recording when they call you IVR Play Select the tone you want people to hear when they call you Index This field is configurable only when you select Early Media See Section 21 10 on page 250 for information on how to record these tones Music On Hold Select this option to play a customized recording when you put people on hold IVR Play Select the tone to play when you put someone on hold Index This field is configurable only when you select Music On Hold See Section 21 10 on page 250 for information on how to record these tones Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 21 4 The SIP Service Provider Screen Use this screen to view the SIP service provider information on the Device Click VoIP SIP SIP Service Provider to open the following screen Figure 144 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Pr
91. and User Agent 2 exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly without involving the proxies When User Agent 2 hangs up he sends a BYE request User Agent 1 replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated Voice Coding A codec coder decoder codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals The Device supports the following codecs G 711 is a Pulse Code Modulation PCM waveform codec PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples G 711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth G 726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM ADPCM waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction the less space needed to describe it G 726 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps G 729 is an Analysis by Synthesis AbS hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds G 729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps Voice Activity Detection Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD detects whether or not speech is present This lets the Device reduc
92. and then 2 European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone Press the flash key to put the caller on hold When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice European Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone 2 Diala phone number directly to make another call 3 When the second call is answered press the flash key and press 3 to create a three way conversation 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection 5 f you want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections one is on line the other is on hold press the flash key and press 2 21 10 2 3 USA Type Supplementary Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command timeout 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted Table 123 USA Flash Key Commands COMMAND SU
93. another schedule for 00 00 08 00 Description Enter more information for this rule here Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Firewall 15 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Device s security settings Use the firewall to protect your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it By default the firewall allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN The following figure illustrates the default firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 115 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN 15 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the Device Section 15 2 on page 197 Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules Section 15 3 on page 197 Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming outgoing filtering rules Section 15 4 on page 199 Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service DoS attacks
94. applies User MAC VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 205 Chapter 17 Parental Control Table 92 Security gt Parental Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Internet Access This shows the day s and time on which parental control is enabled Schedule Network This shows whether the network service is configured If not None will be shown Service Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured If not None will be shown Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 17 2 1 Add Edit a Parental Control Rule Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites Figure 124 Parental Control Rule Add Edit General Active Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User Custom Internet Access Schedule Day I Everyday Monday Tuesday I Wednesday 7 Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Time Start End 00 00 24 00 00 00 24 00 No access B Authorized access Network Service Network Service Setting Block selected s
95. atr uns 126 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 1 To 192 168 1 255 match forward 10 05 00 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 02 127 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 131 TO 192 168 1 255 match forward 10 05 17 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 02 128 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 1 To 192 168 1 255 match forward 10 05 30 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 02 End of Firewall Log VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 307 Chapter 37 Logs Setting VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Firmware Upgrade 38 1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site or www zyxel com to use to upgrade your device s performance Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device 38 2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress Figure 180 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Upgrade Firmware Current Firmware Version 1 00 AAKL 0 b2 File Path The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 148 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This is the present Firmware version and the date created Firm
96. button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the Device see Section 6 6 on page 86 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which For the Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 10 9 2 PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be static it cannot be changed or dynamic in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the config
97. click Network Setting NAT Applications The following screen appears Figure 84 Network Setting gt NAT gt Applications Add new application 1 Age of Empires VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Network Setting gt NAT gt Applications LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Click this to add a new NAT application rule application Application This field shows the type of application that the service forwards Forwarded WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded Server IP This field displays the destination IP address for the service Address Modify Click the Delete icon to delete the rule 10 3 1 Add New Application This screen lets you create new NAT application rules Click Add new application in the Applications screen to open the following screen Figure 85 Applications Add WAN Interface ADSL Server IP Address 192 168 1 Application Category servers E Application Forwarded Web Server z View Rule ox ma The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Applications Add LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Interface Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the ap
98. clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP 104 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 7 Home Networking 7 1 Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 7 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address subnet mask and DHCP settings of your Device Section 7 2 on page 107 Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Section 7 3 on page 111 Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the Device Section 7 4 on page 112 Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP Section 7 7 on page 122 Use the STB Vendor ID screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box STB devices when they request IP addresses Section 7 8 on page 123 Use the 5th Ethernet Port screen to configure the WAN port as the Ethernet WAN port or a LAN port Section 7 9 on page 123 Use the LAN VLAN screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802 1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports Section 7
99. connection through IKE negotiations Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 It uses 6 messages in three round trips SA negotiation Diffie Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces a nonce is a random number This mode features identity protection your identity is not revealed in the negotiation VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 However the trade off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre shared key authentication 20 5 5 IPSec and NAT Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the Device NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet When using AH protocol packet contents the data payload are not encrypted A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrit
100. control signaling VoIP internet gaming or other real time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 9 4 The Queue Setup Screen Click Network Setting QoS Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Figure 74 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup Add new Queue DefaultQueue WAN 8 1 DT 0 PriQ1 WAN 1 1 DT 0 47 PriQ2 WAN 2 1 DT 0 40 PriQ3 WAN 3 1 DT 0 ZW PriQ4 WAN 4 1 DT 0 ZW PriQ5 WAN 5 1 DT 0 ZW PriQ6 WAN 6 1 DT 0 ZW PriQ7 WAN 7 1 DT 0 ZW B note maximum 8 configurable entries for WAN port and maximum 3 configurable entries for each LAN port If queue is deleted then related classifiers will be removed too VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Queue Click this button to create a new queue entry This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the queue is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active Name This shows the descriptive name of
101. end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end to end loopback test F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test F5 end end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end to end loopback test VMG8924 B10A User s Guide EJ Chapter 40 Diagnostic VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Device Access and Login nternet Access Wireless Internet Access USB Device Connection UPnP 41 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Device does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on Make sure the Device is turned on Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on Turn the Device off and on If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 5 on page 20 Check the hardware connections Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables Turn the Device off and on VMG8924 B10A User s Guide L3 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor
102. example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme 1 Click start Start in Windows 2000 NT Settings Control Panel Figure 197 Windows XP Start Menu EZ Internet Explorer e My Documents le Outlook Express W Paint Files and Settings Transfer W BI Command Prompt e My Music Acrobat Reader 4 0 is My Computer Tour Windows XP R Windows Movie Maker E Control Panel j My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures ka Printers and Faxes Q9 Help and Support Search All Programs gt 17 Run Log Off 0 Turn Off Computer 5 untitled Paint VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 In the Control Panel double click Network Connections Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT Figure 198 Windows XP Control Panel amp Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q JO search Folders Ez Address Control Panel Vg Control Panel Network Add Hardware G Switch to Category View Connections t See Also F s Fonts Game Controllers A Windows Update 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties Figure 199 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties Ss Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qe gt gt 2 Search lie Folders E Address r3 Network Connections LANorHigh Speed Internet Network
103. following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Wireless gt General Basic WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption Generate password automatically Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password The password field will not be configurable when you select this option Password 1 4 The password WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same password WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one password only one password can be activated at any one time VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 17 Wireless gt General Basic WEP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION more less Click more to show more fields in this section Click less to hide them WEP Encryption Select 64 bits or 128 bits This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 2 3 More Secure WPA 2 PSK The WPA PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP Using a Pre Shared Key PSK both
104. for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 41 3 Internet Access cannot access the Internet 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 20 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting gt Broadband screen These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in the Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the Device 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them 5 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection 1 Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one 2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface Network Setting gt Broadband screen with the Internet acc
105. function off EEFE IVR Use these to set up Interactive Voice Response IVR IVR allows you to record custom caller ringing tones the sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone and on hold tones the sound someone hears when you put their call on hold HEHH Internal Call Call the phone s connected to the Device 262 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Table 124 Phone Functions Summary ACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 82 One Shot Caller Display Call 67 One Shot Caller Hidden Call Activate or deactivate caller ID for the next call only VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Log 22 1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator as e mail or to a syslog server 22 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System Log screen to see the system logs Section 22 2 on page 266 Use the Security Log screen to see the security related logs for the categories that you select Section 22 3 on page 267 22 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites
106. habits 17 Maximum Burst Size MBS 66 MBSSID 97 MD 315 media server 188 activation 189 iTunes server 188 MEP 315 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 67 multicast 68 multimedia 250 Multiple BSS see MBSSID multiplexing 65 LLC based 65 VC based 65 multiprotocol encapsulation 65 N NAT 155 156 157 168 169 356 applications 171 IP alias 171 example 170 global 169 IGA 169 ILA 169 inside 169 IPSec 230 local 169 outside 169 port forwarding 156 port number 171 services 171 SIP ALG 164 activation 165 traversal 230 NAT example 172 NCC statement 394 negotiation mode 229 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Index Network Address Translation see NAT Network Address Translation see NAT Network Map 37 network map 29 NNTP 171 non proxy calls 247 O OK response 254 256 other documentation 2 outside header 228 P Pairwise Master Key PMK 375 377 passwords 25 26 PBC 98 Peak Cell Rate PCR 66 peer to peer calls 247 Per Hop Behavior see PHB 151 PHB 151 258 phone book speed dial 247 phone functions 262 PIN WPS 99 example 100 Ping of Death 196 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 171 POP3 171 port forwarding 156 ports 20 Power Mgmt 191 Power Mgmt Add 193 PPP over Ethernet see PPPoE PPPoE 44 65 Benefits 65 PPTP 171 preamble 90 93 preamble mode 97 prefix delegation 47 pre shared key 232 Printer Server 189 printer sharing and LAN 190 requirements 189 private IP address 12
107. limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Traffic Rate Traffic Rate Traffic Time Time Before Traffic Policing After Traffic Policing The Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms Token Bucket Filter TBF Single Rate Two Color Maker srTCM and Two Rate Two Color Marker trTCM You can specify actions VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS which are performed on the colored packets See Section 9 8 on page 150 for more information on each metering algorithm 9 3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Network Setting QoS General to open the screen as shown next Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth See Section 9 1 on page 137 for more information Figure 73 Network Settings gt QoS gt General QoS Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled WAN Managed Upstream Band width kbps LAN Managed Downstream Band width kbps Upstream traffic priority Assigned by None 7 B Note You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE sets the value automatically If Enable QoS checkbox is selected choose a default DSCP mark to automatically mark incoming traffi
108. manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events Click Maintenance SNMP to open the following screen Use this screen to configure the Device SNMP settings Figure 174 Maintenance gt SNMP SNMP Agent Get Community Set Community System Name System Location System Contact Trap Destination O Enable Disable public private SystemName unknown unknown 0 0 0 0 Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 143 Maintenance SNMP LABEL SNMP Agent DESCRIPTION Select Enable to let the Device act as an SNMP agent which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Device through the network Select Disable to turn this feature off Get Community Set Community Enter the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Enter the Set community
109. network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control I nformation starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish
110. of this classifier VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action VMG8924 B10A User s Guide E Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS 9 5 1 Add Edit QoS Class Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen Figure 77 Class Setup Add Edit Please follow the guidance through step 1 5 to configure a QoS rule Step1 Class Configuration Active Class Name Classificaiton Order Last Step2 Criteria configuration Use the configurations below to specify the characteristics of a data flow need to be managed by this QoS rule Basic From Interface An H Ether Type NA X Source Adress Subnet NetmasWPrefix Length Exclude m PotRage J Exclude MAC MAC Mask tS T Exclude Destination Address lr Subnet NetmaskiPrefix Length Cs Exclude PotRage Exclude MAC ESF 1 MAC Mask L 4 Exclude Others Service F Exclude IP protocol TCP zb F Exclude DHCP TCM Pakettengn Exclude pscp _ 0 63 T Exclude 802 1P 0BE x Exclude VLANID _ 0 4094 Exclude
111. one another How to Find Out More See Chapter 4 on page 37 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario See Section 21 10 on page 250 for advanced technical information on SIP 21 2 Before You Begin Before you can use these screens you need to have a VoIP account already set up If you don t have one yet you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet e You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready before you start to configure the Device 21 3 The SIP Account Screen The Device uses a SIP account to make outgoing VolP calls and check if an incoming call s destination number matches your SIP account s SIP number In order to make or receive a VoIP VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice call you need to enable and configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port The SIP account contains information that allows your Device to connect to your VoIP service provider See Section 21 3 1 on page 235 for how to map a SIP account to a phone port Use this screen to view SIP account information You can also enable and disable each SIP account To access this screen click Vol P SIP SIP Account Figure 142 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account Add new account SIP 1 ServiceProvider 1 changeme 4 UW Each field is described in the following table Table 110 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account LABEL
112. or less Recording Custom Tones Use the following steps if you would like to create new tones or change your tones 1 Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu 2 Press a number from 1101 1105 on your phone followed by the key 3 Play your desired music or voice recording into the receiver s mouthpiece Press the key 4 You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can hang up the receiver when you are done Listening to Custom Tones Do the following to listen to a custom tone 1 Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu 2 Press a number from 1201 1208 followed by the key to listen to the tone 3 You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can hang up the receiver when you are done Deleting Custom Tones Do the following to delete a custom tone 1 Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu 2 Press a number from 1301 1308 followed by the key to delete the tone of your choice Press 14 followed by the key if you wish to clear all your custom tones VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 257 Chapter 21 Voice 21 10 1 21 10 2 You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can han
113. or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox 4 shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components L 2 Management and Monitoring Tools 1 8MB j 2 Networking Services 0 3 MB L1 ut Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 9 MB VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 5 Inthe Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Networking Services To add or remove a component click the check box amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services B RIP Listener 1 E Simple TCP IP Services amp Universal Plug and Play Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next 7 6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on th
114. screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to configure a WAN connection The screen varies depending on the interface type mode encapsulation and IPv6 IPv4 mode you select 5 2 1 1 Routing Mode Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL VDSL over ATM connection type Routing mode and PPPoE encapsulation The screen varies when you select other interface type encapsulation and IPv6 IPv4 mode Figure 23 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode General Active Name Type Mode Encapsulation IPv6 IPv4 Mode PPP Information PPP User Name PPP Password PPP Trigger Type Idle Timeout minutes PPPoE Service Name PPPoE Passthrough IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically O Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS server DNS DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 ADSL VDSL over PTM Routing v PPPoE IPv6 IPv4 DualStack v O Auto Connect Connect on Demand O Manual O Dynamic Static password unmask IPv6 Address IPv6 Address IPv6 Routing Feature MLD Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway IPv6 DNS Server IPv6 DNS IPv6 DNS Serve
115. settings e amp o e Intemet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet Eo This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones r Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional TE Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level D Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window Figure 234 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings Settings Scripting B Active scripting 9 Enable O Promp 8 Allow paste operations via script Q Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt 8 Scripting of Java applets Q Disable Prompt hA b bem Anbhanki AM af Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset cm Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 UnderJava permissio
116. that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network 6 10 3 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication See Section 6 10 3 3 on page 95 for information about this Table 29 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP 1 WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports For example suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no authentication Suppose the wireless network has two devices Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wi
117. the Device s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol open port the Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application For example Figure 86 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example Jane s E computer Lt i Dh Internet EL Real Audio Server 1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server port 7070 2 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the Device to record Jane s computer IP address The Device associates Jane s computer IP address with the open port range of 6970 7170 3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 4 The Device forwards the traffic to Jane s computer IP address 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out The Device times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Triggering to open the following screen Use this screen to view your Device s trigger port settings Figure 87 Network
118. the DHCP server on the Device assigns to the clients in the default and or user defined groups If you set the Device to assign IP addresses based on the client s DHCP Vendor ID option information you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP IP settings for both the default and user defined groups See Chapter 7 on page 105 for more information VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 177 Chapter 12 Interface Group In the following example the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5 0 meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client is assigned the IP address 192 168 2 2 and uses the WAN VDSL PoE pppO 1 interface Figure 101 Interface Grouping Application Default ETH 2 4 192 168 1 x 24 eth10 0 Jo z VDSL PoE pppO 1 DSL 192 168 2 x 24 DHCP Vendor ID option MSFT 5 0 Click Network Setting gt Interface Group to open the following screen Figure 102 Network Setting gt Interface Group Add New Interface Group Group Name Default ptm0 1 atm0 pppo3G0 ptm0 2 LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 WL ZyXEL The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 73 Network Setting gt Interface Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Click this button to create a new interface group Interface Group Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group LAN Interfaces This shows t
119. the IP port TCP UDP ICMP or Other that defines your customized port Ports Protocol For TCP UDP ICMP or TCP UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that Number defines the custom service For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the rule Service Name Enter a unique name up to 32 printable English keyboard characters including spaces for your customized port Service Enter a description for your customized port Description Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 15 4 The Access Control Screen Click Security gt Firewall Access Control to display the following screen This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules Figure 119 Security gt Firewall gt Access Control Add new ACL rule Rules Storage Space usage 3 12596 Any Any None Any gt Any ACCEPT Ls The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Security gt Firewall gt Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new ACL Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic rule This is the index number of the entry VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall Table 88 Security gt Firewall gt Access Control continued LABEL
120. the protocol and the port of the rule Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Blocked Site URL Keyword Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Device blocks access Click Delete to remove it Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 207 Chapter 17 Parental Control VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 18 1 Overview You can define time periods and days during which the Device performs scheduled rules of certain Scheduler Rule features such as Firewall Access Control in the Scheduler Rule screen 18 2 The Scheduler Rule Screen Use this screen to view add or edit time schedule rules Click Security Scheduler Rule to open the following screen Figure 125 Security gt Scheduler Rule Add new rule 08 00 exampl puna 7 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 94 Security gt Scheduler Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this to create a new rule This is the index number of the entry Rule Name This shows the name of the rule Day This shows the day s on which this rule is enabled Time This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled Descr
121. the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server E mail Log Settings Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail addresses specified below If this field is left blank logs and alert messages will not be sent via E mail System Log Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e mail message that Mail Subject the Device sends Security Log Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e mail message that Mail Subject the Device sends Send Log to The Device sends logs to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank the Device does not send logs via E mail Send Alarm to Alerts are real time notifications that are sent as soon as an event such as a DoS attack system error or forbidden web access attempt occurs Enter the E mail address where the alert messages will be sent Alerts include system errors attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites If this field is left blank alert messages will not be sent via E mail Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated Allowed Set what percent of the Device s log storage space can be filled before the Device sends a Capacity Before log e mail Email Clear log after Select this to delete all the logs after the Device sends an E mail of the
122. this field If this field is left blank notifications cannot be sent via e mail Interval Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the Device to e mail you Enable Log Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field Basic Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 5 4 The Advanced Screen Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable ADSL over PTM Annex M DSL PhyR and SRA Seamless Rate Adaption functions The Device supports the PhyR retransmission scheme PhyR is a retransmission scheme designed to provide protection against noise on the DSL line It improves voice video and data transmission resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer Click Network Setting gt Broadband gt Advanced to display the following screen Figure 28 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Advanced xDSL setup ADSL over PTM O Enable 9 Disable Annex M O Enable O Disable PhyR US O Enable O Disable PhyR DS O Enable O Disable SRA O Enable O Disable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Network Setting gt Network Setting gt Broadband LABEL DESCRIPTION ADSL over PTM Select Enable to use ADSL over PTM Since PTM has less overhead than ATM some ISPs use ADSL over PTM for better performance
123. this queue Interface This shows the name of the Device s interface through which traffic in this queue passes Priority This shows the priority of this queue Weight This shows the weight of this queue Buffer This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue Management Queue management algorithms determine how the Device should handle packets when it receives too many network congestion Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action 9 4 1 Adding a QoS Queue Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue Figure 75 Queue Setup Add Buffer Management Rate Limit Active Name Interface H Priority 1 High Weight ERES Drop Tail DT kbps ox ees The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Queue Setup Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable this queue Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied This field is read only if you are editing the queue VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 48 Queue Setup Add continued LABEL DESCRIPTION
124. this to activate the WAN configuration settings Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Mode Select ADSL VDSL over PTM as the interface that you want to configure The Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP s DHCP server directly If you select Bridge you cannot use routing functions such as QoS Firewall DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port s VLAN This section is available only when you select ADSL VDSL over PTM in the Type field Active Select this to add the VLAN Tag specified below to the outgoing traffic through this connection VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 8 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Bridge Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1p IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Select the IEEE 802 1p priority level from O to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level 802 1q Type the VLAN ID number from 0 to 4094 for traffic through this connection QoS Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection This is the maximum tran
125. throughput but it makes the connection more stable SNR Margin This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio margin in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets Actual Delay This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay It is the wait in milliseconds that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved assembled and then transmitted Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line The bigger the delay the bigger the data block size allowing better error correction to be performed Transmit Power This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power in dBm Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port Receive Power Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port Downstream is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider Actual INP Sudden spikes in the line s level of external noise impulse noise can cause errors and result in lost packets This could especially impact the quality of mul
126. to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 95 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global IP Address IP Address WAN 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 13 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 12 IGA 3 192 168 1 13 IGA 4 192 168 112 IST wa Inside Local Inside Global Address ILA Address IGA TENE LLI 192 168 1 10 170 VMG8924 B10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 10 4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application where three inside LANs logical LANs using IP alias behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks Figure 96 NAT Application With IP Alias A LAN1 192 168 1 X B IP 1 IGA 1 192 168 1 1 IP 3 IGA 3 LAN3 192 168 3 X 4 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT Table 69 Servi
127. to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 25 2 ARP Table Screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s To open this screen click System Monitor gt ARP Table Figure 162 System Monitor gt ARP Table IPv4 ARP Table c 2 1 192 168 1 74 00 02 e3 57 e2 1c 2 192 168 1 2 00 24 21 7ef8 44 i IPv6 Neighbor Table 275 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 25 ARP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 132 System Monitor gt ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the ARP table entry number IPv4 IPv6 This is the learned IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of a device connected to a port Address MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address Device This is the type of interface used by the device You can click on the device type to go to its configuration screen 276 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 26 1 Overview Routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet Routing Table 26 2 The Routing Table Screen Click System Monitor gt Routing Table to open the following screen Figure 163 System Monitor gt Routing Table IPv4 Routing Table 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 U 0 br1 li 255 255 255 0 U 0 br
128. up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 226 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 Di d m m a m m m m m m na e How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is O then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 153 Subnet Masks 1ST
129. web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 10 2 Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 68 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to anot
130. wireless data network or understand the data carried on it VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless These security standards do two things First they authenticate This means that only people presenting the right credentials often a username and password or a key phrase can access the network Second they encrypt This means that the information sent over the air is encoded Only people with the code key can understand the information and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key These security standards vary in effectiveness Some can be broken such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol WEP Using WEP is better than using no security at all but it will not keep a determined attacker out Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly For example the WPA PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker s software to guess for example a twenty letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess for example a three letter word from the dictionary Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker it s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place A good way to c
131. with another AP before connecting to it Select Enabled to turn on preauthentication in WAP2 Otherwise select Disabled Network Re Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to auth Interval stay connected If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group Update Timer key out to all clients 6 3 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets BSSs on the Device Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt More AP The following screen displays Figure 38 Network Setting gt Wireless gt More AP ZyXEL446C97_Guest1 Mixed WPA2 PSK WPA PSK NIA ZyXEL446C97_Guest2 Mixed WPA2 PSK WPA PSK N A ZyXEL446C97 Guest3 Mixed WPA2 PSK WPA PSK N A VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Network Setting gt Wireless gt More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Status This field indicates whether this SSID is active A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Device s BSSs The SSID Service Set IDent
132. you want to configure a customized protocol select Specific Service Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol Choose the IP port TCP UDP TCP UDP ICMP or I CMPv6 that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Custom Source This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol Port Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source Custom This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol Destination Port ue Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination Policy Use the drop down list box to select whether to discard DROP deny and send an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender of REJ ECT or allow the passage of ACCEPT packets that match this rule Direction Use the drop down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies Enable Rate Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream downstream transmission rate for the Limit specified protocol Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop down list box You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add New Rule This will bring you to the Security Scheduler Rules screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel
133. 0 261 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CCMs 315 CE statement 394 certificate factory default 212 Certificate Authority See CA certificates 211 authentication 211 CA creating 212 public key 211 replacing 212 storage space 212 Certification Authority 211 Certification Authority see CA certifications 393 notices 394 CFI 68 CFM 315 CCMs 315 link trace test 315 loopback test 315 MA 315 MD 315 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 397 Index MEP 315 MIP 315 channel 369 interference 369 channel wireless LAN 93 Class of Service 258 Class of Service see CoS client list 111 client server protocol 251 comfort noise generation 256 compatibility WDS 87 configuration backup 311 firewalls 197 reset 313 restoring 312 static route 63 131 132 175 Connectivity Check Messages see CCMs copyright 393 CoS 150 258 CoS technologies 138 creating certificates 212 CTS Clear to Send 370 CTS threshold 89 93 D data fragment threshold 89 93 DDoS 196 default server address 164 Denials of Service see DoS DH 232 DHCP 106 126 differentiated services 258 Differentiated Services see DiffServ 150 Diffie Hellman key groups 232 DiffServ 150 marking rule 151 DiffServ Differentiated Services 258 code points 258 marking rule 258 digital IDs 211 disclaimer 393 DLNA 188 DMZ 164 DNS 106 126 DNS server address assignment 68 documentation related 2 Domain Name 171 Domain Name System see DNS D
134. 0 IP Subnet Mask 000 Offer Public IP by DHCP r Enable ARP Proxy E Facil Cea The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Additional Subnet LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias Setup Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings See Chapter 12 on page 177 for how to create a new interface group Active Select the checkbox to configure a LAN network for the Device IP Address Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Device Public LAN Active Select the checkbox to enable the Public LAN feature Your ISP must support Public LAN and Static IP IP Address Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP IP Subnet Mask Enter the public IP subnet mask provided by your ISP VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 34 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Additional Subnet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Offer Public IP Select the checkbox to enable the Device to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server by DHCP Enable ARP Select the checkbox to enable the ARP Address Resolution Protocol proxy Proxy
135. 0 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 353 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 157 Subnet 1 continued IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 158 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 64 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 159 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 160 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 192 168 1 192 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255
136. 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF04 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF07 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 Table 170 Reserved Multicast Address continued MULTICAST ADDRESS FF08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF09 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and Pv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FC00 0000 0000 0000 Interface ID In IPv6 an interface ID is a 64 bit identifier It identifies a physical interface for example an Ethernet port or a virtual interface for example the management IP address for a VLAN One interface should have a unique interface ID EUI 64 The EUI 64 Extended Unique Identifier defined by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6 It is derived from the 48 bit 6 byte Ethernet MAC address as shown next EUI 64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address See the following ex
137. 0A User s Guide Wireless 6 1 Overview This chapter describes the Device s Network Setting Wireless screens Use these screens to set up your Device s wireless connection 6 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This section describes the Device s Wireless screens Use these screens to set up your Device s wireless connection Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Section 6 2 on page 72 Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device Section 6 3 on page 80 Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the Device Section 6 4 on page 84 Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS view or generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number Section 6 5 on page 85 Use the WMM screen to enable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications Section 6 6 on page 86 Use the WDS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System in which the Device acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points Section 6 7 on page 87 Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features such as the RTS CTS Threshold Section 6 8 on page 89 Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Section 6 9 on page 91 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapte
138. 0A User s Guide Chapter 31 Remote Management Table 138 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Certificate HTTPS Select a certificate the HTTPS server the Device uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS Certificate client You must have certificates already configured in the Certificates screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 31 3 The Trust Domain Screen Use this screen to view a list of public IP addresses which are allowed to access the Device through the services configured in the Maintenance Remote MGMT screen Click Maintenance Remote MGMT gt Turst Domain to open the following screen Note If this list is empty all public IP addresses can access the Device from the WAN through the specified services Figure 169 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Trust Domain Add Trust Domain The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 139 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Trust Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Trust Click this to add a trusted host IP address Domain IPv4 Address This field shows a trusted host IP address Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the trust IP addres
139. 1 2 The Remote MGMT Screen Use this screen to configure through which interface s which services can access the Device You can also specify the port numbers the services must use to connect to the Device Click Maintenance Remote MGMT to open the following screen Figure 168 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT Service Control WAN Interface used for services any_WAN OMulti WAN ADSL VDSL ETHWAN pppo3G HTTPS v Enable Enable 443 HTTP v Enable Enable 80 TELNET v Enable Enable 23 FTP v Enable Enable 21 SSH v Enable Enable 22 Certificate HTTPS Certificate Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 138 Maintenance Remote MGMT LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Interface Select Any WAN to have the Device automatically activate the remote management service used for when any WAN connection is up services Select Multi WAN and then select one or more WAN connections to have the Device activate the remote management service when the selected WAN connections are up HTTP This is the service you may use to access the Device LAN WLAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the LAN WLAN WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the WAN VMG8924 B1
140. 102 The Pot Forwarding SONS Ii suo ts cece crates eee eee neds 156 TERT Age EO PORE FOIS 25 aperia n EE RAN EUR jatveenn MO DIR ad vetu a EDO ER ER R vRR FU Mens 158 10 the IOP AS er iE 159 10 31 AGd Now AppICAUON e 160 TOt The Port THOSE GORE sinsir aiui nus dedic dur Fa SNN Ara a aa iaai 161 pur xg Aoo Edi Fort Wace ning RUIE e RT 163 IS at DNL SSPBSBHT ya S T A A 164 EH ECRIRE LUTTE 164 DOF The Address ISS DING SOEI e 165 10 7 A PESO Address Mapping PUNE ssssssrussssr irte ia caa RO e RR E pa adi P RR i Pad 166 108 The Address ep rile at ET 167 TOS The OBSS OOIGBI oiii cepe sa iR hence RIRs BRE at o Aes bn haeres ines eps tae p epis 168 jw NI U Ii EMIT STD EU S T asco 168 TAT NAT DS UIAI des 168 T0 30 2 WORSE WAT DOSE e Hr an danda aad par aga pd e db a Rc RR 169 TEL TOO Or DURT a E R edm a sun E E T O toma ada bosser a E pet dtum E oda 170 10 10 4 NAT APP AION aicccsccieese dicbent inicie rei dente a vega sinet rend dente ecu n irre es tn Lacuna 171 Chapter 11 y ami DNS ul 173 DURER 1 0 rrr S 173 Tick What You Gan Do inthis Chapter eisctes uoi does dint eer tad ba Quid doBr ei est elas nae ae 173 TLLA VEL TOS WE TO MME uude scaazacers suedeadend ud epo Pr Id ea e a EE thd d vet Oe ERR RR RUM 174 TLA SE ESTEE ic RTT I E T 174 TETA Edit ONG EMI e eea AEE E aaae 175 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Table of Contents Whe The Dynan DNS
141. 2 375 user authentication 376 vs WPA2 PSK 375 wireless client supplicant 376 with RADIUS application example 376 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 375 WPA2 PSK 375 application example 377 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide
142. 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 227 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting AU Cm URL UR RU A m mm mE EN EM EN EM EM ONE XD NM EN ON m 192 168 1 0 24 am um mE EE EE EM EM EE ED E END E um You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 352 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 228 Subnetting Examp
143. 279 27 2 The lGMP MLD Group Status SOP Bei rriaire aiia rid acc pos annie ec aab tom 279 Chapter 28 XDSL ID LI SCIO STILI EDO em re 281 25 Da xpo SH DOES isso wees Sco bidet io direi EE pem Corpo a poda idee ts 281 Chapter 29 EET E RIDE ERU E RE 285 CONNU E EEE POT EET 285 29 2 The 3G Statistics Screen ooo ccc ceec sees eeeseceeeceeaeeseceeneanesesseuaasneesaeeaueaeedauuausneaadcaeusesansnacsaeasenausass 285 Chapter 30 User PO COMIN aa 287 CES UI Me E EO TEE 287 30 2 The User Account Screen u eic cc ccccccecccceceececccceceeeeeceeeuaeeeeuueeseeeeesseessaueesaeseeuaeaeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeeaeaaaeeess 287 Chapter 31 Remote ManagoelTiGkit iaa aant cava iba pakz24 ei an ERE EI ERA TR 2B EREAR EPI UI AE ER KMa DEL AR AIR RAERLELEM XE RA UAR A Ia REA IA d IS 289 CAPE S iV Emme 289 21 2 The Remote MGMT SG OEN A ete espe acid apto e Bote ER ssec a Eire br pedis inb epe VPE Rerdesg A 289 SEES MT MELDA Sea ROTER TP 290 aT The Add Trust Doma Seren siia ie onnaa memet nto quse ELLO EE Su bcR ORCI C Lass c Ea 291 Chapter 32 Pini fe eec EAE 293 Pe RE ETT ES a alia seine tian ga 293 32 2 The TR 069 Client SO BBEY cance scarcicccccacricischensecdcte ode eaactondreedanonsinadade danse oadssoadete E IAEA A NE 293 12 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 33 GIN 5g cesses crac tate M IM MU M EIE IM 295 RENE Ei We DT I Pe HT 295 CX SUAE MIL quim METTE TRETE
144. 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Enhanced Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless Multicast unicast traffic Forwarding Guest WLAN Select this to create Guest WLANs for home and external clients Select the WLAN type in the Access Scenario field Access If you select Home Guest clients can connect to each other directly Scenario If you select External Guest clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly Maximum Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in Upstream kilobits per second Kbps Bandwidth Maximum Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in Downstream kilobits per second Kbps Bandwidth BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled E mail notificatio n when the wireless guest visit Notification to Email Enable Email Select this to have the Device e mail you a notification when a wireless client is connected Notification to the wireless network Mail Server Select a mail server for the e mail address s
145. 4 B10A User s Guide 231 Chapter 20 VPN The type of ID can be a domain name an IP address or an e mail address The content is the IP address domain name or e mail address Table 107 Local ID Type and Content Fields LOCAL ID TYPE CONTENT IP Type the IP address of your computer DNS Type a domain name up to 31 characters by which to identify this Device E mail Type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify this Device The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Local ID Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address 20 5 7 1 ID Type and Content Examples Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel The two Devices in this example can complete negotiation and establish a VPN tunnel Table 108 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example Device A Device B Local ID type E mail Local ID type IP Local ID content tom yourcompany com Local ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID type IP Remote ID type E mail Remote ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID content tom yourcompany com The two Devices in this example cannot complete their negotiation because Device B s Local ID Type is IP but Device A s Remote I D Type is set to E mail An ID mismatched message displays in the IPSEC LOG Table 109 Mismatching ID T
146. 41 2 Device Access and Login forgot the IP address for the Device 1 The default LAN IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the Device it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 6 on page 22 forgot the password 1 The default admin password is 1234 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 6 on page 22 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address Section 7 2 on page 107 use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Device 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See Section 1 5 on page 20 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix C on page 357 4 If it is possibl
147. 63 The Device first uses DNS Name Authority Pointer NAPTR records to determine the transport protocols supported by the SIP server It then performs DNS Service SRV query to determine the port number for the protocol The Device resolves the SIP server s IP address by a standard DNS address record lookup The SIP Server Port and REGI STER Server Port fields in the General section above are grayed out and not applicable and the Transport Type can also be set to AUTO if you select this option RFC PRACK RFC 3262 defines a mechanism to provide reliable transmission of SIP provisional 3262 Require response messages which convey information on the processing progress of the request 100rel This uses the option tag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgement PRACK method Select this to have the the peer device require the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably VoIP IOP Flags Select the VoIP inter operability settings you want to activate Replace dial Replace a dial digit with 9623 in the INVITE messages digit to 96 23 in SIP messages Remove 5060 and transport udp from request uri in SIP messages Remove 5060 and transport udp from the Request URI string in the REGISTER and INVITE packets Remove the Route header in SIP messages Remove the Route header in SIP packets Don t send re Invite to the remote party when there are multiple codecs
148. 66 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support W
149. 7 product registration 396 protocol 44 PSK 375 push button 22 Push Button Configuration see PBC push button WPS 98 Q QoS 137 150 258 marking 138 setup 137 tagging 138 versus CoS 137 Quality of Service see QoS Quick Start Guide 2 R RADIUS 372 message types 372 messages 372 shared secret key 373 RADIUS server 95 Real time Transport Protocol see RTP registration product 396 related documentation 2 remote management TR 069 293 Remote Procedure Calls see RPCs 293 reset 22 313 restart 313 restoring configuration 312 RFC 1058 See RIP RFC 1389 See RIP VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Index RFC 1483 65 RFC 1889 253 RFC 3164 265 RIP 135 router features 18 Routing Information Protocol See RIP RPPCs 293 RTP 253 RTS Request To Send 370 threshold 369 370 RTS threshold 89 93 S security wireless LAN 93 Security Log 267 Security Parameter Index see SPI service access control 289 290 291 Service Set 74 83 Services 171 Session Initiation Protocol see SIP setup firewalls 197 static route 63 131 132 175 silence suppression 256 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP Single Rate Three Color Marker see srTCM SIP 250 account 250 call progression 254 client 251 identities 250 INVITE request 254 255 number 251 OK response 256 proxy server 252 redirect server 252 register server 253 servers 251 service domain 251 URI 250 user agent 252
150. 7 Up 1000M Full Channel Auto Current 1 NoLink N A Security Mixed WPA2 PSK WPA PSK NoLink N A 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n Mixed NoLink N A WPS Off Disabled N A 5G WLAN Information Up MAC Address EC 43 F6 44 6C 99 Ethernet WAN NoLink NIA Status On NoLink N A SSID AAAAAA NoDevice N A Channel Auto Current 48 Security No Security 802 11 Mode 802 11n ac Mixed WPS Off Security Firewall Medium Account Status Service Provider URI Inactive ServiceProvider 1 changeme changeme changeme As illustrated above the main screen is divided into these parts A title bar B main window C navigation panel 2 2 1 Title Bar The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner 2 English v FF Quick Start Logout The icons provide the following functions Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Language Select the language you prefer s ersten VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 27 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Quick Start Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the Device s time zone Internet access and wireless settings rm Logout Click this icon to log out of the web configurator E Logout 2 2 2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields It is discussed in the re
151. A User s Guide Chapter 19 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Create Certificate Request LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Type up to 63 ASCII characters not including spaces to identify this certificate Name Common Name Select Auto to have the Device configure this field automatically Or select Customize to enter it manually Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation domain name or e mail address in the field provided The domain name or e mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Organization Name Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs You may use any character including spaces but the Device drops trailing spaces State Province Name Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located You may use any character including spaces but the Device drops trailing spaces Country Region Name Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving After you click Apply the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate request signed by a Certificate Authority If you alre
152. AC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Most Secure Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 371 Appendix D Wireless LANs IEEE 802 1x RADIUS In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are User based identification that allows for roaming Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks Authentication Determines the identity of the users Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connec
153. Account Screen Click Maintenance User Account to open the following screen Figure 167 Maintenance gt User Account User Name Old Password New Password Retype to confirm B Note The password must contain 6 to 256 characters The password must contain at least one numeric character and one alpha character The characters in password cannot contain your username The password must contain 6 to 256 characters The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 137 Maintenance gt User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name This field displays the name of the account that you used to log in the system Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password 6 to 256 characters At least one numeric character and one letter are required After you change the password use the new password to access the Device Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 287 Chapter 30 User Account 288 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Remote Management 31 1 Overview Remote management controls through which interface s which services can access the Device Note The Device is managed using the Web Configurator 3
154. Apply to activate the DMZ host Clear the IP address field and click Apply to deactivate the DMZ host 192 168 1 Seal The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 62 Network Setting gt NAT gt DMZ LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not Address specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Note If you do not assign a Default Server Address the Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 10 6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway ALG A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream When the Device registers with the SIP register server the SIP ALG translates the Device s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP VoIP ALG in the Device To access this screen click Network Setting NAT ALG Figure 90 Network Setting gt NAT gt ALG NAT ALG SIP ALG RTSP ALG Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled O Enable Disable Enab
155. Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 7 8 The STB Vendor ID Screen Set Top Box STB devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes don t renew their IP addresses before the lease time expires This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an IP address that gets assigned to another device Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected STBs to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP addresses Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt STB Vendor ID to open this screen Figure 60 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt STB Vendor ID Please enter Vendor ID for STB Vendor ID 1 Vendor ID 2 Vendor ID 3 Vendor ID 4 Vendor ID 5 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt STB Vendor ID LABEL DESCRIPTION Vendor ID 1 Enter the STB s vendor ID 5 Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 7 9 The 5th Ethernet Port Screen If you use a DSL connection you can configure your Ethernet WAN port as an extra LAN port This Gigabit Ethernet port provides faster transmission speeds Click Network Setting Home Networking gt 5th Ethernet Port to open this screen VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Network
156. B COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call After the second call is successful press the flash key again to have a three way conference call Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call Flash 98 Transfer the call to another phone USA Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring USA Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to your telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice USA Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold 2 When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone USA Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls 1 When you are on the phone talking to so
157. C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 239 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 367 Appendix D Wireless LANs disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 240 Basic Service Set annn Ethernet wuamuweo o ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of over
158. Call Forward When Busy Disable 244 Outbound Proxy Address One Shot Call Waiting Enable 85 Outbound Proxy Port 5060 1025 65535 One Shot Call Waiting Disable 70 RTP Port Range Do Not Disturb Enable O5 Start Port 51000 1026 65494 Do Not Disturb Disable O5 End Port 65500 1032 65500 Call Completion on Busy Subscriber 37 CCBS Deactivate SRTP Support Outgoing SIP 12 SRTP Support Dial Plan Crypto Suite AES CM 128 HMAC SHA1 80 W Encryption and Authentication type Dial Plan Enable DTMF Mode DTMF Mode RFC2833 Transport Type Transport Type UDP Dialing Interval Selection Ignore Direct IP Dialing Interval Selection 3 w second OkEnable pisable Immediate Dial Enable FAX Option Immediate Dial Enable G 711 Fax Passthrough Or 38 Fax Relay Fax Passthrough Codec Oc 711Mulaw GG 7114law Each field is described in the following table Table 113 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Service Provider Selection Service Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in Provider this screen If you change this field the screen automatically refreshes Selection General SIP Service Enter the name of your SIP service provider Provider Name SIP Local Port Enter the Device s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default va
159. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 15 5 The DoS Screen DoS Denial of Service attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks Click Security Firewall DoS to display the following screen Figure 121 Security gt Firewall gt DoS DoS Protection Blocking Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Deny Ping Response C Enable Disable a The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 Security gt Firewall gt DoS LABEL DESCRIPTION DoS Protection Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks Blocking Deny Ping Select Enable to block ping request packets Response Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 202 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide MAC Filter 16 1 Overview You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen This applies to wired and wireless connections Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00
160. Corrected blocks CRC This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks ES This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least one errored block or at least one defect SES This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing 30 or more errored blocks or at least one defect This is a subset of ES UAS This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds LOS This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds LOF This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds LOM This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 29 1 Overview 3G Statistics Use the 3G Statistics screens to look at 3G Internet connection status 29 2 The 3G Statistics Screen To open this screen click System Monitor 3G Statistics The 3G status is available on this screen only when you insert a compatible 3G dongle in a USB port on the Device Figure 166 System Monitor gt 3G Statistics Status 3G Status Service Provider Signal Strength Connection Uptime 3G Card Manufacturer 3G Card Model E220 3G Card F W Version 11 117 09 04 00 SIM Card IMSI 466923200740613 Chunghwa Telecom 83 dBm Good 0 days 0 hours 2 minutes The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 136 System Monitor gt 3G Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Select how often you want the Device to update this screen Select No Ref
161. DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation The Device supports the I PCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen 7 12 4 LAN TCP IP The Device has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the Device The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private
162. Delete icon to remove the share from the Device Account Management Add New User Click this button to create a user account to access the secured shares Active Select this to allow the user to access the secured shares Status This field shows the status of the user 3 The user account is not activated for the share amp The user account is activated for the share User Name This is the name of a user who is allowed to access the secured shares on the USB device Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the user account Click the Delete icon to remove the user account from the Device Apply Click this to save your changes to the Device Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 13 2 1 The Add New Share Screen Use this screen to create a share To access this screen click the Add new share button in the Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing screen Figure 107 Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing gt Add new share Volume Share Path Description Access Level Add Share Directory x Public v Each field is described in the following table Table 77 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing gt Add new share LABEL DESCRIPTION Volume Select the volume where you want to create the share Share Path Type in the location of the share or click the Browse button to locate the folder
163. Enable Call Transter El amp nabie Call waiting Cluusic On Hold Call Waiting Reject Timer 10 60 Second IVR Play Index Caution Apply Cancet 10 180 Second Each field is described in the following table Table 111 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account This field displays ADD_NEW if you are creating a new SIP account or the SIP Selection account you are modifying SIP Service Select the SIP service provider profile to use for the SIP account you are Provider configuring in this screen This field is read only when you are modifying a SIP Association account General Enable SIP Select this if you want the Device to use this account Clear it if you do not want Account the Device to use this account SIP Account Enter your SIP number In the full SIP URI this is the part before the symbol Number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Authentication Username Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters Password Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Table 111 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION App
164. Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange File Sharing General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech IID U TCP IP USB Printer Sharing VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figure 214 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP Oo TCP IP Comect vla r Setup Configure DHCP Client ID IP Address lt will be supplied by server 7 Suret mask lt will be supplied by server gt Router address lt will be supplied by server gt Search comans Name server addr x will be supplied by server gt 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Turn on your Device and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh
165. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qs gt 2 Pp Search i Folders E Address e Network Connections Internet Gateway Ue Internet Connection Disabled Internet Connection LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks Create a new connection 9 Set up a home or small office network See Also Local Area Connection Enabled Network Troubleshooter AEE BEERS a A Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Other Places b Control Panel LJ My Network Places r My Documents 4 My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your Device and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays 7 My Network Places File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Oo Bact id Ka Search gt Folders E Address My Network Places Local Network Network Tasks gg Add a network place amp View network connections Set up a home or small office network wy View workgroup computers gt gt Other Places Create Shortcut Delete Renam
166. Guide Chapter 22 Log 22 3 The Security Log Screen Use the Security Log screen to see the security related logs for the categories that you select Click System Monitor gt Log gt Security Log to open the following screen Figure 157 System Monitor gt Log gt Security Log Level Emergency x Category Al z Clear Log Refresh Export Log Email Log Now The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 127 System Monitor gt Log gt Security Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Level Select a severity level from the drop down list box This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected When you select a severity the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher Category Select the type of logs to display Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Export Log Click this to export the selected log s Email Log Now Click this to send the log file s to the E mail address you specify in the Maintenance gt Logs Setting screen This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Level This field displays the sever
167. Guide 377 Appendix D Wireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 167 Wireless Security Relational Matrix METHOD KEY FECIT ENTER IEEE 802 1X N METHOD MANUAL KEY j MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Ys Diae WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 119 or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage
168. IGMP or MLD multicast group to which the interface belongs VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 279 Chapter 27 IGMP MLD Status Table 134 System Monitor gt IGMP MLD Group Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Filter Mode I NCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast group s traffic EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast group s traffic but other IP addresses can Source List This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast group s traffic depending on the filter mode 280 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide xDSL Statistics 28 1 The xDSL Statistics Screen Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics Click System Monitor xDSL Statistics to open the following screen Figure 165 System Monitor gt xDSL Statistics Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh v Line Line0 Status VDSL Training Status Showtime Mode VDSL2 Annex VDSL Profile Profile 17a Traffic Type PTM Mode Link Uptime 0 day 15 hours 59 minutes VDSL Port Details Upstream Downstream Line Rate 30 539 Mbps 70 989 Mbps Actual Net Data Rate 30 460 Mbps 70 843 Mbps Trellis Coding ON ON SNR Margin 21 0 dB 22 7 dB Actual Delay 4 ms 4 ms Transmit Power 1 1 dBm 11 3 dBm Receive Power 0 9 dBm 10 0 dBm Actual INP 16 0 symbols 16 0 symbols Total Attenua
169. ION Add new rule Click this to create a new rule Set This is the index number of the address mapping set Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is blank for One to One mapping types This is the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for the Many to One mapping type Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is blank for One to One and Many to One mapping types VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Table 64 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This is the address mapping type One to One This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type Many to One This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation the Device s Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only Many to Many This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Modify Click
170. IP precedence and or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class The following table shows you the internal layer 2 and layer 3 QoS mapping on the Device On the Device traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Table 55 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY IEEE 802 1P USER QUEUE PRIORITY TOS IP DSCP IP PACKET ETHERNET PRECEDENCE LENGTH BYTE PRIORITY 0 1 0 000000 1 2 2 0 0 000000 21100 3 3 1 001110 250 1100 001100 001010 001000 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 151 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 55 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY IEEE 802 1P USER QUEUE PRIORITY TOS IP DSCP IP PACKET ETHERNET PRECEDENCE LENGTH BYTE PRIORITY 4 4 2 010110 010100 010010 010000 5 5 3 011110 250 011100 011010 011000 6 6 4 100110 100100 100010 100000 5 101110 101000 7 7 6 110000 7 111000 Token Bucket The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted The bucket stores tokens each of which represents one byte The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size so the bucket can hold up to b tokens Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate The following s
171. Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Add Remove Programs Properties 2 xl Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add of remove a component select or clear the check box If the check box is shaded only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components v G Address Book Communications KY Desktop Themes 0 0 MB v li Games 10 1 MB Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB 1 Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 5 of 10 components selected Details Have Disk OK Cancel Apply 3 In the Communications window select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box x To install a component select the check box next to the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to install it amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details
172. Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is blank for One to One mapping types Global Start IP Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for the Many to One mapping type VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Table 65 Address Mapping Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is blank for One to One and Many to One mapping types Set Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 10 8 The Address Mapping Screen Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored Click Network Setting NAT Address Mapping to display the following screen Figure 93 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping Add new rule 192 168 1 32 10 1 2 3 One to One The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 66 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this to create a new rule Set Thi
173. Log Mail Subject Send Log to E Mail Address Send Alarm to E Mail Address Alarm Interval 60 Second Allowed Capacity Before email Notification 80 96 Clear log after sending mail O Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Active Log and Alert System Log Security log Send immediate alert v System Firewall Attacks YI DHCP client MAC Filter Blocked Web Sites v PPPoE Forward Web Sites Blocked Web Sites Wireless Attack Y DHCP Server Certificate UPnP IPSec NAT Account Static Route DDNS IGMP Qos TR 069 NTP XDSL Internet VoIP VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 37 Logs Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 147 Maintenance gt Logs Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Setting Syslog Logging The Device sends a log to an external syslog server Select Enable to enable syslog logging Mode Select the syslog destination from the drop down list box If you select Remote the log s will be sent to a remote syslog server If you select Local File the log s will be saved in a local file If you want to send the log s to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file select Local File and Remote Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of
174. N 295 Chapter 34 ll n e 297 SUL TDI IT Eee eee EP DUELO RE Renee DL IU PD IM Ce rim i M Ling E E PVC 297 34 2 The SNMP Bene eiai ames tcice Gare lie dept Cisl Sande maddnsousartdacncineiaiedesee E ee EAEE EENE 297 Chapter 35 liu 1 N M 299 ESAE E i ME PPS 299 zo Ds HS CDS iepiefii telis ie miset etcisde boe dio saebeiu ados eio amd ce isa os tid fasce hub iMd sep CE NES Cr UR eee E 299 Chapter 36 Emal LDeIDDMLE ETT 303 SG EB orones un Mc eo PLA PI EM ML ID A CC LU M E AM DE RU EE 303 36 2 The Email Notiiication SoIeell desse ote dUi pte ioa e e pue vente bed Tapa e Edo rds EAA Rini 303 36 2 IS Nr EIER ETT Emm 304 Chapter 37 Logs SEMINO T m Q 305 EINE EU TE ee E Pun 305 crea ME esr ldlie Sei sse 305 cre ccpit 306 Chapter 38 FPN ARMAS Upor AC fe nr M 309 RIN Mmmm 309 382 The Frimwale TIN canann a aa mt 309 Chapter 39 Conia UO e E aeeacauatacaccmsasaaasusamiecanesaden 311 CONES ana a RNN 311 oe Th COI URANO GOTEN ariarian aoaaa A r EAA RE EE 311 39 3 The Reboot Scree 1usednsseurtese cia ca ai aeaa aaa aaa EE bene AEE qc ma RR 313 Chapter 40 BIhuecpM 315 AY RN icr ER ET ERO me m 315 23 1 What You Cari Do In bis GROB Loss perci cid race ca enc Pe bob adeat d e pna a
175. N gt Monitor to open this screen as shown next Figure 137 Security gt IPSec VPN gt Monitor Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh v Status hae new_connection 1 1 1 1 192 168 1 0 192 168 2 0 Trigger B Note IPSectunnels follow the Firewall Security Level You can add Firewall ACL Rule to accept some services This screen contains the following fields Table 104 Security gt IPSec VPN gt Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen Select No Refresh to have the Device stop updating the screen Status This displays a green line between two hosts if the VPN tunnel has been established successfully Otherwise it displays a red line in between Connection Name This displays the name of the VPN policy Remote Gateway This is the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA Local Addresses This displays the IP address es on the LAN behind your Device Remote This displays the IP address es on the LAN behind the remote IPSec router Addresses Action Click Trigger to establish a VPN connection with the remote network 20 5 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this section 20 5 1 IPSec Architecture The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows 226 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Figure 138 PSec Archit
176. NAP header This is available only when you select I PoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field VC MUX In VC multiplexing each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the Device needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload LLC ENCAPSULATI ON More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC This is available only when you select PPPOA in the Encapsulation field LLC SNAP ROUTI NG In LCC encapsulation an IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802 1a SubNetwork Attachment Point SNAP header This is available only when you select I PoA in the Encapsulation field Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate
177. On The Device is receiving power and ready for use PWR SYS Blinking The Device is self testing Red On The Device detected an error while self testing or there is a device malfunction off The Device is not receiving power 7 Green On The ADSL line is up DSL Blinking The Device is initializing the ADSL line Orange On The VDSL line is up Blinking The Device is initializing the VDSL line Off The DSL line is down VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device Table 1 LED Descriptions continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION D Green On The Device has an IP connection but no traffic INTERNET Your device has a WAN IP address either static or assigned by a DHCP server PPP negotiation was successfully completed if used and the DSL connection is up Blinking The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode Red On The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server no PPPoE response PPPoE authentication failed 2 Green On The Device has a successful 1000 Mbps Ethernet connection on the WAN WAN Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to from the WAN at 1000 Mbps Orange On The Device has a successful 10 100 Mbps Ethernet connection on the WAN Blinking The Device is sendi
178. P Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Others VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 50 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Service This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application When you select a predefined application you do not configure the rest of the filter fields IP Protocol This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP UDP ICMP or IGMP If you select User defined enter the protocol service type number DHCP
179. PA 2 continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is Number 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the Secret external authentication server and the Device The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device The key is not sent over the network Select password unmask to show your entered password in plain text more less Click more to show more fields in this section Click less to hide them WPA This field is only available for WPA2 Select this if you want the Device to support WPA and Compatible WPA2 simultaneously Encryption Select the encryption type TKIP AES or TKI P AES for data encryption Select TKI P if your wireless clients can all use TKIP Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES Select TKI P AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES WPA2 Pre This field is available only when you select WPA2 Authentication ARA 7 4 Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication
180. PA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in whi
181. PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 374 The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 1
182. Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 232 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings x Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 4 192 168 1 1 Add Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAG Close 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that J avaScripts are allowed VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 233 Internet Options Security i x General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security
183. Port configured to the same port the input text of Translation Start Port can be configurable and when user configure this value to different port number its means cofigure for Port Translation one to one mapping 2 WAN IP is optional If user wants to present Multi to Multi NAT user can assign the desired device WAN IP Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Port Forwarding Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear the checkbox to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters A Z a z 1 2 and so on WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled WAN IP Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined If the packet s destination IP address doesn t match the one specified here the port forwarding rule will not be applied VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Table 57 Port Forwarding Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets To forward only one port enter the port number again in the End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field End Port Enter t
184. S exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS When Intra BSS traffic blocking is disabled wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS traffic blocking is enabled wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 48 Basic Service set AP BSS NU uM L4 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 10 6 MBSSID Traditionally you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets BSSs As well as the cost of buying extra APs there is also the possibility of channel interference The Device s MBSSID Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously You can then assign varying QoS priorities and or security modes to different SSIDs Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP 6 10 6 1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously You must use different keys for different BSSs If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs they are in different BSSs but have the same keys they may hear each other s communications but not communicate with each other MBSSID shoul
185. SK WPA PSK 802 11b g n Mixed Off EC 43 F6 44 6C 99 On AAAAAA Auto Current 48 No Security 802 11n ac Mixed Off Medium System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage 0 days 0 hours 26 minutes 01 Jan 2013 01 47 19 i 14 43 NAT Session Usage 0 Interface Ethernet WAN Status Up NoLink NoLink NoLink Disabled Up NoLink NoLink NoDevice Rate 1000M Full N A N A N A N A 1 3G N A N A N A Account Status Inactive Service Provider ServiceProvider 1 changeme changeme changeme URI VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens Each field is described in the following table Table4 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen Device Information Host Name This field displays the Device system name It is used for identification Model Number This shows the model number of your Device Firmware This is the current version of the firmware inside the Device Version WAN Information These fields display when you have a WAN connection WAN Type This field displays the current WAN connection type MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Media Access Control Address of your Device IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN Click Release to
186. Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT to open the following screen The figure in this screen shows the NAT session statistics for hosts currently connected on the Device Figure 160 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT Refresh Interval 15 seconds 192 168 12 28 Total 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 130 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen Device Name This displays the name of the connected host IP Address This displays the IP address of the connected host MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the connected host No of Open This displays the number of NAT sessions currently opened for the connected Session host Total This displays what percentage of NAT sessions the Device can support is currently being used by all connected hosts 272 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide VoIP Status 24 1 The VoIP Status Screen Click System Monitor gt VolP Status to open the following screen You can view the VoIP registration current call status and phone numbers in this screen Figure 161 System Monitor gt VoIP Status Pollinterval s 10 sec SIP Status SIP1 Call Status changeme bue cc Loc cul c m c cc PJWu ncc M Inactive changeme gch
187. Section 15 5 on page 202 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 15 1 2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN ACK response While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN ACK it queues up all outstanding SYN ACK responses on a backlog queue SYN ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users DoS Denials of Service DoS attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources The ZyXEL Device is pre configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks DDoS A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system LAND Attack In a LAND attack hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a ping
188. Seredi onsast eredi rta PCR ROLE poo aa ocn agant a boc Rc i da apa 175 Chapter 12 liic r0 a aA a a 177 LLO ON a 177 121 1 What Vo Cait De ie its Aene Hem 177 124 TIN FCU TAS Grop IT iosian an d cdi ra epa Onda Eua aed DO adr Onda arp Fd 177 TERT meiace Group SOMALIA srinaranata aaaea 178 iaae menice Grepplng CNE snina a A roa piedad pd das 180 Chapter 13 USB OS iiaia a aara aR 183 AEE UII E A a A E 183 1 1 1 What You Gan Do inthis Chaplet sssini aiina aae 183 13 42 Whai rou Need To RION secs scare suck opes I RUBER iaa a I OVE I AD 183 EE Ir m m ET 185 TOS The eC an Oe SY asd ps poaae oup oap poa Caec anao bc Eph p Ran dae dina 186 13 2 1 The Add New Share Soret esseri s drank ab Sea dao rou ERANA 187 13 22 The Add New User DOIBBH qasscivoddiiert sedent toedentertvtidade EE R E Ia a dra 188 13 3 he Media Server Screan sissies aan ania CERT Ln PVREEI T A TREE ad V VIV aia 188 E Xu E 81488 000000 Em 189 EC WE mem 189 13 4 2 The Panter Server GOTEC ecrane Lada pila cr kalp caa Kad i pr aden 190 Chapter 14 Power MAanagormbobl usiisieniea inia kd kia RR RR RR2 ARX REX EXREEE EPOR RERIFEL A EL AA FRE IAI E TAR EUER VERE MEL ALEGRE EE 191 p ufa 11 ee ET 191 14 1 1 What Xou Can Do TEM GEOSECuiassitec Fr eo pr th ot Ra Rp d aud bu RH R 191 143 2 Whai TOU ESSI TEE SHE aoticcscuiemiuddaceib med van NO PE LERNEN Ces Delo ee unge epo eee 191 142 The Power Managetmoht SCION iuusszeccompisessedsprceseibedeese aiaa E n
189. Setting gt NAT gt Port Triggering E test VDSL 5191 5191 TCP or UDP 5191 5191 TCP 4 B Note 1 The sum of trigger ports in all rules must be less than 1000 and every open port range must be less than 1000 When the protocol is TCP UDP the ports are counted twice 2 The TCP port 30005 is reserved for TRO69 connection request port The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Triggering LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this to create a new rule This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded Trigger Start Port The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN This is the first port number that identifies a service Trigger End Port Trigger Proto This is the last port number that identifies a service This is the trigger transport layer protocol Open Start Port The open port is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sen
190. Sieen s oir tet icta a S peres a a bc EE cir dee Pd st ad 205 17 2 1 Add Edit a Parental Gontrol Rule 15 2 itr rie te ao xo deese E das Ho pha code koc ANENE 206 Chapter 18 iege ci M T E D TN 209 IIONO S DI ru MERERI RUD me RR ORE HERR ener eed ec 209 18 2 The Scheduler Rule Screen oui cee ce ccecceccece cee eececesceseeeeeseeceaeeuaceseeaueuaueeeseeauaesceeeeesaaaueeeeueaseaneuess 209 15 29 Au Eod coe UIE 2 cacct cci toe hose recede op ocio oe Oei eatin cedenthatcunweae FL od cea pisa pet 210 Chapter 19 Oe oko Locis ooa COR EHE RE ont eot m EI MEL LEE i I 211 DONE I MENOR 211 19 1 1 Whai You Lan De In MMs Chaptal eset QUI ober dedo Depos ab reet an dob ee UI did Dept ido dob Pu SEENEN 211 192 What Your Bleed ID KNOW ae screen baer deca e Deed br tac arvo Ap v ERI e E tet ERE eoa oir ved Ue dived acl 211 19 3 The Local Certificates Screen 1 uesoc eatis skx coca une kot qus kk vane u Ran arcu Run qe Era rk space x RB NOE DRE 211 icu Ee i Ew uded Au H MR 212 18 2 Loa Signed CRTC ausocsputexttiseiaepo dr beca Sd prona peo Strap GA GS PL Rp bcp adr acm 213 194 Thi Wied UA SCHOO accucitexcuxibau tudo iae Dl Pm DN ID DEC i E DD IL D SRM LE 214 151 7 View Moed CA TANS ie tol octo e eese dar ce partea pe Bal sid opes En cde les S co an recette de 216 194 2 import Trusted CA CPCS uuuoussientesktencupu Fabr put E opa QUE kb numen uL X ana d e EG 217 Chapter 20 NBN icsiidtiucess b vicitat osea boil Maio AE ka EP e ERE TUER EXE EAE PEE Ae F
191. T routers between the Device and remote IPSec router The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal and the NAT routers have to forward UDP port 500 packets to the remote IPSec router behind the NAT router Otherwise select Disable Phase 1 Mode Select the negotiation mode to use to negotiate the IKE SA Choices are Main this encrypts the Device s and remote IPSec router s identities but takes more time to establish the IKE SA Aggressive this is faster but does not encrypt the identities The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Table 103 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit Hellman Group for Key Exchange LABEL DESCRIPTION Encryption Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA Choices are Algorithm DES a 56 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES a 168 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm AES 128 a 128 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES 196 a 196 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES 256 a 256 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm Longer keys require more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput Integrity Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data Choices are MD5 SHA1 Algorithm SHA is
192. This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a DHCP option If you select Vendor Class I D DHCP Option 60 enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware If you select User Class ID DHCP Option 77 enter a string that identifies the user s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets Packet This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Length Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length from 46 to 1500 in the fields provided DSCP This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided 802 1P This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a priority level between 0 and 7 from the drop down list box 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number TCP ACK This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field If you select this option the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK Acknowledge flag Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier DSCP Mark This f
193. ZyXEL VMG8924 B10A Dual Band Wireless AC N VDSL2 VolP Combo WAN Gigabit IAD Version 1 00 Edition 1 6 2013 Default Login Details LAN IP Address http 192 168 1 1 Login admin Password 1234 Copyright 2013 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Device and get up and running right away VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview DL MRNA E E LU I I TI E E I S ia 15 Iuris Nb Gy Tie DOCE e ce T pieaned da gndedu ein giseetbceesadeateecaneeieenanceuneeles 17 THO VEH CONDAT Ra tecti Gd erent errr eer tr revere tre AN Treen 25 VEIT ne GET ee eae ee ET E T TT DD 33 5 0 e 35 Neiwoik Map and Stats INS suisia anaia ida OG uisa deber a A EN D RA nd 37 iv anis T E 43 TOES sry sag scutacaitainiaurssha px EEG ARTE RR DOR ed d a AO agendo ado ce uid Pride d cepe ae Hoz ed RAE AE 71 Home RORO P TE 105 zi o EP E EE A P E E E E T E T 129 E Teli SC SB TG a a E E A A hina E ANE E 137 Einer Miis ccr pL Nr ET 155 Dyn
194. a 299 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 3 Contents Overview be nos PROTEUS 95s Gto p bona Na bg a Rod A p ORBE GOES a aai A A ERR Aa PD a a v a aa ERR 303 Esci rro M Tc EA wore IN 305 xiu n AM oo Mee 309 epe M D 311 ROW o o S E 315 TODS DOCIO coronis 321 4 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents olli i ol ole R 3 iri i Reo lg 5 ludit dci 15 Chapter 1 Miroducing th A O A 17 pRE PIO XT S 17 1 2 Ways To Manage Ino SWIG 2 ixtossubbii tuxu Eae coated gucnadie to deaies a a iaa E aa Fata DRE Raul SA Tf 1 9 Good Habits Tor Managing Hie Device uuseteenidetat peer aabt enrO ad RE edad eaebwoncan dient Fre rid en NDEARNA Tz 124 Applicauons Ter 1i DEVICE qisasedut auia adn c a Haag dabas ad cR da va tata ao dr Haas Kauai RO 18 x ics CCP 18 LEN Davics s USE SUPRON deem et 19 Ta LEDS LDR I bd oU Pen E A E Kurs cep E 20 EB Wnhe RESETEBUDRE secs ca rene D a N 22 EARS Pu 22 Tt Uema ihe I Un WPS UNIS MAT E o m Tm 22 1o css UITE PD Ee E o LL 0S 1 EO 23 Chapter 2 The Web CMR ica aaa a
195. a single computer to the outside world Finding Out More See Section 10 10 on page 168 for advanced technical information on NAT 10 2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 389 Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192
196. ables higher transmittion rate A 40MHz channel bonding or dual channel channel bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput An 80MHz channel bonds two adjacent 40 MHz channels to get even higher data rates The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz or 80 MHz It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding Control Sideband This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz or 80MHz Set whether the control channel set in the Channel field should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands Passphrase Type If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password the setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password Select None to set the Device s password generation to not be based on a passphrase Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters 0 9 A Z with no spaces It must contain both letters and numbers and is case sensitive For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters
197. access accordingly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 376 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 243 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example f B Y j im a WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 244 WPA 2 PSK Authentication PSK mom VMG8924 B10A User s
198. ack to the device that sent the request Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests 252 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C 1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server B 2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with C s IP address or domain name 3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C Figure 153 SIP Redirect Server SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity to IP address or domain name mapping The register server checks your user name and password when you register RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP the RTP Real time Transport Protocol is used to handle voice data transfer See RFC 1889 for details on RTP Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 253 Chapter 21 Voice SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call A calls B Table 119 SIP Call Progression A B 1 INVITE ges 4 2 Ringing E 3 OK 4 ACK
199. ackets in the same flow are given the same priority CoS class of service is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 137 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types CoS technologies include IEEE 802 1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ Differentiated Services or DS IEEE 802 1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field which replaces the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header Tagging and Marking In a QoS class you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP DiffServ Code Point value IEEE 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet When the packet passes through a compatible network the networking device such as a backbone switch can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker Traffic Shaping Bursty traffic may cause network congestion Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre configured data transmission rate using buffers or queues Your Device uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate Traffic Rate Traffic Rate Traffic Time Time Before Traffic Shaping After Traffic Shaping Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the
200. addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services DS field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802 1p prioritization at layer 2 you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer 3 network IP precedence uses three bits of the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header There are eight classes of services ranging from zero to seven in IP precedence Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the Device the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802 1p priority level
201. ady have click Load Signed to import the signed certificate into the Device Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen Figure 129 Certificate Request Created Name Type Subject Signing Request test request CN cc5d4e VMG8924 B10A4 S090Y00000000 0 abc ST tw C US BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST MIIBKzCB OIBADBUMSowKAYDVQODEYyFjYzVkNGUtVk1HODKkyNC 1CMTBBLVMwOTBZ 19 3 2 Load Signed Certificate After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority in the Local Certificates screen click the certificate request s Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate into the Device VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 19 Certificates Note You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import it Figure 130 Load Signed Certificate Paste signed certificate Certificate Name Certificate BEGIN CERTIFICATE E iinsert certificate here END CERTIFICATE soon Snel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Load Signed Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name This is the name of the signed certificate Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the Device Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 19 4 Th
202. al agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical LLC based Multiplexing VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual
203. alue and the MAC address of the device Select DUI D EN DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number to enter the vendor s registered enterprise number Select DUI D LL DUID Based on Link layer Address to enter the device s hardware type and hardware address MAC address in the following fields Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field DHCP Option Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic 125 Enterprise Enter the vendor s 32 bit enterprise number registered with the IANA Internet Assigned Number Numbers Authority Manufactur Specify the vendor s OUI Organization Unique Identifier It is usually the first three bytes er OUI of the MAC address Product Enter the product class of the device Class Model Enter the model name of the device Name Serial Enter the serial number of the device Number Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 12 Interface Group VMG8924 B10A User s Guide USB Service 13 1 Overview You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on your network The following figure is an overview of the Device s file server feature Computers A and B can access files on a USB device C which is connected to the Device Figure 105 File Sharing Overview The Device wil
204. amic DNS ET ost once bb teen b bas ue ero eR A ee reer Rua Me na Pieds net re Ter Tyr RES 173 DCE TGS SPMD MNT NR TO D T 177 Jhifo nto Ke T 183 Pee aaO cussaservengo aanoday asini A 191 FIBI csi ep Ui Ue Ud P UD QE PR B NE CDM M T Mi Me M iMe Mim qe id UM 195 MA PRT yoa ener y rrmesen yt rr SMe rrers Serene eer errs R meee er rere re 203 SE r ts assises dto detiene E DE pP A Fare ED E EOS au Ea ER rr A SR LR di o Sr oa 205 Che dulor BS spunnin ia RE nEERPE CORE PEL RE PED QURE VEL REN EPA RRREU E GUY MIR E QUT AN RUE CEU o LEUR ede hPa 209 UE III EMITE TT eA An EA m 211 Lig Mo core 219 poc m cece E unica ees cm mca ede Ss ae cine cine E ep aa se E ee cmc cig eked eee anaes 233 mo eer 265 Hcr ce a 269 od a 2c 273 BUMP WAN ies aussie T A oni Pix cuin o kao ve Pn vase cu nues li dann Fuscus Rd 275 Poona ODE mec T ait eig PME SHANG v E soca tesen ppt enaa iad th wile a annua I 279 po Wie ELE BS updated DUS Ud NEHME HIT n EE Ld a Ido enda 281 C eEri n MM T 285 USE ADOBE os eb PEEu PEOR EMda ul abo FR anda vasca ra bbc amet aono paa ashame ee 287 lume cui UR D ER E DD S2 S LL 289 Te et eet sce ecw cacti den s ee Ae ate nd eae eee eet 293 e sores ett iva wat aa aad ae Sea ai i aka es dn Sina LUE RR Gu Ea LaL oir DA need 295 c aee EUR 297 TIERE AEE soceri qat abb Farc apa c E PD pip bbb un aa bent ebat dont la aa rn Gd s
205. ample MAC 00 13 49 12 34 56 EUI 64 02 13 49 BENED e 34 56 Identity Association An Identity Association IA is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information The IA type is the type of address in the IA Each IA holds one type of address IA NA means an identity association for non temporary addresses and IA TA is an identity association for temporary addresses An IA NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields but an IA TA option does not The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA NA before the lifetimes expire After T1 the client sends the server S1 from which the addresses in the IA NA were obtained a Renew message If VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond the client sends a Rebind message to any available server S2 For an lA TA the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client s discretion T2 Tl M l l 6 S1 amn o S2 w Renew to S14 toS to S DHCP Relay Agen
206. an send cells Type the PCR here This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Sustainable The Sustainable Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be Cell Rate transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR PPP Information This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPOA in the Mode field PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Select password unmask to show your entered password in plain text PPP Triger Type Select when to have the Device establish the PPP connection Auto Connect select this to not let the connection time out Connect on Demand select this to automatically bring up the c
207. angeme No Duration Status Codec Peer Number 0 00 00 Idle Phone Status Phone 1 Phone 2 SIP1 changeme SIP 1 changeme SIP 1 changeme SIP1 changeme The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 131 System Monitor gt VoIP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Poll Interval s Enter the number of seconds the Device needs to wait before updating this screen and then click Set Interval Click Stop to have the Device stop updating this screen SIP Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the Device Registration This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You can change this in the Status screen Registered The SIP account is registered with a SIP server Not Registered The last time the Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the Device or when you activate it Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account Registration Time This field displays the last time the Device successfully registered the SIP account The field is blank if the Device has never successfully registered this account URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in the Vol P SIP screens VMG8924 B10A U
208. ansport mode the IP packet contains the security protocol AH or ESP located after the original IP header and options but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet such as TCP and UDP With ESP protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process Therefore the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data With the use of AH as the security protocol protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process Tunnel Mode Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption This is the most common mode of operation Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers Outside header The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway nside header The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header IKE Phases There are two phases to every IKE Internet K
209. apter 28 xDSL Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 135 Status gt xDSL Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select the time interval for refreshing statistics Line Select which DSL line s statistics you want to display xDSL Training Status This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection Mode This displays the I TU standard used for this connection Traffic Type This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving Inactive displays if the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic Link Uptime This displays how long the port has been running or connected since the last time it was started xDSL Port Details Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider Line Rate These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data Actual Net Data Rate These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic Trellis Coding This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and receiving Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions Trellis may reduce
210. ar device to the enrollee devices Whether the network uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless
211. ard compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 155 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP Unused 6 bit 2 bit The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold call waiting and call transfer are generally available from your VoIP service provider The Device supports the following services 3 The Device does not support DiffServ at the time of writing VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Call Return Call Hold Call Waiting Making a Second Call Call Transfer Call Forwarding Three Way Conference nternal Calls Call Park and Pickup Do not Disturb IVR Call Completion CCBS Outgoing SIP Note To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the Device s phone ports you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider 21 10 2 1 The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time a few hundred milliseconds before rele
212. asing it On newer telephones there should be a flash key button that generates the signal electronically If the flash key is not available you can tap press and immediately release the hook by hand to achieve the same effect However using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise With manual tapping if the duration is too long it may be interpreted as hanging up by the Device You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key 21 10 2 2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command timeout 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted Table 122 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call Switch back to the call if there is no second call Flash 0 Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer Flash 1 Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Table 122 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB COMMAND DESCRIPTION
213. ave the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection This allows Enable the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system Default default gateway Gateway IPv6 DNS Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section Server IPv6 DNS Select Dynamic to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Select Static to have the Device use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually IPv6 DNS Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server 1 IPv6 DNS Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server 2 VLAN These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL VDSL over PTM Active Select this option to add the VLAN tag specified below to the outgoing traffic through this connection 802 1p IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Select the IEEE 802 1p priority level from 0 to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level 802 1q Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection QoS Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection This is the maximum transmiss
214. ave the Device ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this field 3G Connection S Card description ettings This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in the Device Otherwise it displays N A VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup continued following static DNS IP address LABEL DESCRIPTION Username Type the user name of up to 64 ASCII printable characters given to you by your service provider Password Type the password of up to 64 ASCII printable characters associated with the user name above PIN A PIN Personal Identification Number code is a key to a 3G card Without the PIN code you cannot use the 3G card If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication enter the 4 digit PIN code 0000 for example provided by your ISP If you enter the PIN code incorrectly the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication leave this field blank Dial string Enter the phone number dial string used to dial up a connection to your service provider s base station Your ISP should provide the phone number For example 99 is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan APN Enter the APN Access Point Name provided by your service provider Co
215. aylight Saving You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month The Time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States set the day to Second Sunday the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would set the day to Last Sunday and the month to March The time you select in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month The Time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States yo
216. bb ust D netta Gi Ex Sapa b RES EK ES ua RSS 265 esc Tg operan Log SOBRE coated edt REED Nd bep St P S ERE FOTO ER epa RU SOR T buon S 266 22o The Sep Lao SO BP ebria brenda bua pend manana hake aant ER OC ene Ra 267 Chapter 23 Inge cp m RE 269 CEONBECS EU IER E tome 269 23 1 1 Whal You Gan Don Xi Chaplet sessin e oa eL npn a x pM UR e epu EE CC UR dE 269 pas The WAN SISSE uossoxscsenden isuDa anpa aE e ESE Pah lu een banks ua dS RI ASK Fox Due a REN Pd gs 269 29 0 The LAN Staus SOPBEN si cuis Eie uiebo MUT edes Uis ap tear HM Pree reer rer UD Mis Mida a vere MM ddjots 271 294 rhe BAT SUD DO BE cala Dei nob be e nicae e EM E E kp ER cea Er iR eo equa T 272 Chapter 24 VSIP SEIS ene Oe ares oe iM E e 273 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide EN Table of Contents 24 The VolP DU CE IN cci sois ada ii matta dent Sa pix d onan dense o eR bbc br d bac S aa EGRE 273 Chapter 25 ARP TAB eheu E mI IL MM ME MEE E EE IM IU RU 275 PAM cv METER 275 2511 Haw ARP WOKS Luccieicisetetic o Eee E RR eR hei t aba br dacamaned tale RM CUL UNE dale p C so UP ane L S 275 25 2 cci Rc 275 Chapter 26 Routing Table uiiiesisexresensbr bui RERFEREREXR PRSE EROR EENREXEER RYE FIXRPERSRPIVAYPRRARURI FEY FERARR RAN EPA iaasa aisiki adiis 277 PRA VON EN ETT e 277 26 2 The Routing Table Saree Lope a POL ep ERE CH EPDYREC Lp DERE Up OO PSEUD EUR ORC LP Ra p RR 277 Chapter 27 DEL WR B BEIDE TTE 279 Ar RPI IN aa dup EU EM iM LEO I M ARE PU ED E MILL aac ALI EE
217. c without reference to a particular classifier If the setting of WAN managed upstream bandwidth is greater than current WAN interface linkup rate then the WAN managed upstream bandwidth will become current WAN interface linkup rate Apply Cancet The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Network Setting gt QoS gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION QoS Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance WAN Managed Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate Upstream using QoS Bandwidth The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interfaces speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps You can set this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed The Device uses up to 9596 of the DSL port s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL port s actual transmission speed You can also set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed This will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth If you leave this field blank the Device automatically sets this number to be 9596 of the WAN interfaces actual upstream transmission speed VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS
218. ce between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address As a result the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either but the Device s NAT Traversal feature provides a way to handle this NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Figure 141 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged In the above figure when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA For NAT traversal to work you must Use ESP security protocol in either transport or tunnel mode Use IKE keying mode Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A Finally NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged b
219. ce this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e f the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm
220. ces and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 171 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 97 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 e B 192 168 1 34 192 168 1 1 INTERNE i IP address assigned by ISP C 192 168 1 35 D 192 168 1 36 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 172 Dynamic DNS Setup 11 1 Overview DNS DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it In addition to the system DNS server s each WAN interface ser
221. ch protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the Device needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload e LLC ENCAPSULATION More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field e LLC SNAP ROUTING In LCC encapsulation an IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802 1a SubNetwork Attachment Point SNAP header This is available only when you select I POA in the Encapsulation field Service Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non time sensitive Category such as e mail Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender c
222. ch the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 375 Appendix D Wireless LANs password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre authentication T
223. ched traffic If you select I P you also need to configure source or destination MAC address IP address DHCP options DSCP value or the protocol type If you select 802 1Q you can configure an 802 1p priority level Source Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address Subnet Enter the source subnet mask Netmask Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Destination Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address Subnet Enter the source subnet mask Netmask Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the I
224. cii rmt ie ertt nar e sania RP Ee Rp da park dnb Raga Ee d be add aad 92 610 2 Additional Wireless TRING iuiakemeveiedee etr anek bbe DU dpa ped con RE pe n ddd ehe CE OR dat C dU eU dE 93 6 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Table of Contents B H3 Wireless SEHE Ova Mio sirrinin adeat Da eoi OR ect aa ba dad eap App ba bna ir 93 BO Sine PEODIGIVIB ince pas canny A aepo A m dps ead ndi dcm dera RUN asc rd Dag wd pad a ead 96 PHI NIIS e E ase E tcc Sse E cae ane tp cance a eave dae aa cece pede te eee 96 CEE MES S pem tbta pla epee aa de A gh aged Merny patience A 97 a NEE PISSIBIEC UIE ouosesetenet pa inito iix ma a 97 510 9 Wireless Distibution System VID xcci aseiset aun pen uoce eq eb MERERI tI E Qr cua eo aaia 97 GIUI WIF Protected alU TUE E rrinin iaaa coxa aad umi n d daa acu d d bt 98 Chapter 7 Homo Networking iusinianiaa aisi 22 axe ERR ERERER E VAR MAR ERR REX FRL M RE a Ep a t Fk LuR EN EUR ENEI d REA RANA RMRREpEX AE ERE M IAEA 105 pie is gw 105 Fl What Vou Gan Oo His Cael uosseakascs pi eredi adc a aaa at tbc Rec a oct aao 105 Kew I NNI m E TEE 106 ARCEM 107 T MELAN SU SCEN sirieni napa otn da Kad Cam n GU sue db Le cda tT Trem enn RUE E 107 Ta hs State DACP SOPBBS iiti ti CREE Prd Dat PPPOG ER ERE pee Edd oT RI ERE EU PORE ER V RE E RU 111 TA ee UPP SCG ousioscovd nona raa abr CO Pr ar cr a C b DER Lp C p CP aC LR d 112 5 installing UPnPan Windows Example iunio tea dett rt msi dt Ga n becas utet AAA NEE
225. ck Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 5 5 1 Edit 802 1X Settings Use this screen to edit 802 1X authentication settings Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want to edit The screen shown next appears Figure 30 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x Edit Certificate Trusted CA 802 1x Settings Active Interface atm0 v EAP Identity EAP method EAP TLS Enable Bidirectional Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x Edit Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate the authentication Select this to enable the authentication Clear this to disable this authentication without having to delete the entry Interface Select an interface to which the authentication applies EAP Identity Enter the EAP identity of the authentication EAP method This is the EAP method used for this authentication Enable Select this to allow bidirectional authentication Bidirectional Certificate Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication You need to import the certificate in the Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates screen Trusted CA Select the Trusted CA you want to ass
226. clusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 905 Appendix G Legal Information corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or servi
227. connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 32 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PC SCR ed erue lt gt lt gt Time MBS MBS ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate cells may be dropped Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time VBR RT or non real tim
228. continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network Select Enable MLD Snooping to activate MLD Snooping on the Device This allows the Device to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership It helps reduce multicast traffic Assign Setup MLD Mode Select Standard Mode to have the Device forward IPv6 multicast packets to a port that joins the IPv6 multicast group and broadcast unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports Select Blocking Mode to have the Device block all unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN LAN IPv6 Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address Address Assign Setup Stateless The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration RADVD Router Advertisement Daemon is enabled to have the Device send IPv6 prefix information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations DHCPv6 server is disabled e Stateful The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration The DHCPv6 server is enabled to have the Device act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses to DHCPv6 clients Stateless and Stateful The Device uses both IPv6 stateless and stateful autoconfiguration The LAN IPv6 clients can obtain IPv6 addres
229. cribed in the following table Table 115 VolP gt Call Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear all speed Click this to erase all the speed dial entries on this screen dials Keys This field displays the speed dial number you should dial to use this entry Number Enter the SIP number you want the Device to call when you dial the speed dial number Description Enter a name to identify the party you call when you dial the speed dial number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 21 7 The Call History Summary Screen The Device logs calls from or to your SIP numbers This screen allows you to view the summary of received dialed and missed calls Click Vol P gt Call History gt Call History Summary The following screen displays Figure 148 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Summary Refresh Clear All 248 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Each field is described in the following table Table 116 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the call history list Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the call history list This is a read only index number Date This is the date when
230. ction discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may acc
231. cy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings 1 Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing _ Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 231 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options Ag a General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent
232. d identification when you make VoIP phone calls Clear this if you do not want to send identification Reject Timer Enable Call Select this to enable call transfer on the Device This allows you to transfer an Transfer incoming call that you have answered to another phone Enable Call Select this to enable call waiting on the Device This allows you to place a call on Waiting hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone number Call Waiting Specify a time of seconds that the Device waits before rejecting the second call if you do not answer it Enable Select this if you want the Device to forward all incoming calls to the specified Unconditional phone number Forward Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right Enable Busy Select this if you want the Device to forward incoming calls to the specified Forward phone number if the phone port is busy Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right If you have call waiting the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call Enable No Answer Forward Select this if you want the Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the call is unanswered See No Answer Time Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right No Answer Time This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature Enter the number of seconds
233. d not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802 1x security 6 10 7 Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the Device uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate 6 10 8 Wireless Distribution System WDS The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS Wireless Distribution System links with other APs You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to Once the security settings of peer sides match one another the connection between devices is made At the time of writing WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only Refer to your other access point s documentation for details The
234. d settings 6 7 The WDS Screen An AP using the Wireless Distribution System WDS can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments The WDS screen allows you to configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled Use this screen to set up your WDS Wireless Distribution System links between the Device and other wireless APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device Once the security settings of peer sides match one another the connection between devices is made Note WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any wireless clients Note At the time of writing WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only Not all models support WDS links Check your other AP s documentation Click Network Setting Wireless WDS The following screen displays Figure 43 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WDS Wireless Bridge Setup AP Mode Access Point Bridge Restrict amp Enable C Disable Remote Bridges MAC Address 1 2W 2n 2 Zu ai 3 zu 2n 4 zu EY B Notes 1 The WDS function only works when the security mode is setto No Security WEP WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK 2 The WDS connection security mode is based on the settings configured in the Wireless gt General screen 3 The WDS function only works with the first SSID 4 Ifthe AP mode is Wireless Bridge WPS will be disabled 5 The
235. d shows more information about this rule Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the rule or click the Delete icon to remove it 14 3 2 The Add Edit Rule Screen Use this screen to configure a schedule rule To access this screen click the Add new rule link or the Edit icon in the Network Setting gt Power Management gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules screen Figure 114 Network Setting gt Power Management gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules gt Add new rule Edit Add new rule amp Rule Name BedTime Day M sun M mon M Tue v wen v THU v FRI v sat Time of Day Range From 00 00 To 07 00 hh mm Description VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 14 Power Management Each field is described in the following table Table 84 Network Setting gt Power Management gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules gt Add new rule Edit gt LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Name Type up to 31 alphanumberic characters for the name of this rule Day Select the week day s of the schedule Time of Day Enter the From and To times in hh mm format to set a time period for the schedule You Range can only enter a time period between 00 00 and 23 59 To set a time period crossing over midnight you must split the time period into two schedule rules For example for a time period from 10 00 PM to the next day s 8 00 AM you can set one schedule for 22 00 23 59 and
236. ddress type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Click OK when finished Figure 211 Windows Vista Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings 9 IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Add Edit Default gateways Gateway Metric Add Edit Remove Automatic metric erc Cancel 9 Inthe Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 Properties window the General tab Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es f you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address oH have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them Figure 212 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 ICP IPv4 Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwis
237. dentifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organizational Unit OU Organization O and Country C Certificate This read only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click Back to return to the previous screen VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 19 Certificates 19 4 2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen The Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates Figure 133 Trusted CA Import Certificate The certificate is in one of the following formats Binary X 509 PEM Base 64 encoded Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 Certicate File Path Browse Enable Trusted CA for 802 1x Authentication oe cael The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 101 Trusted CA Import Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate File Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse to Path find it Enable Trusted
238. dentify this Device by an e mail address Select DNS to identify this Device by a domain name Select ASN1DN Abstract Syntax Notation one Distinguished Name to this Device by the subject field in a certificate This is used only with certificate based authentication VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Table 103 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Local ID Content When you select IP in the Local I D Type field type the IP address of your computer in this field If you configure this field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank the Device automatically uses the Pre Shared Key refer to the Pre Shared Key field description It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 in this field or use the DNS or E mail type in the following situations e When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers When you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses When you select DNS or E mail in the Local I D Type field type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify this Device in this field Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Remote ID Type Select I P to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address Select E mail t
239. devices IPv6 Introduction IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 10 8 IP addresses The Device can use IPv4 IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and supports IPv6 rapid deployment 6RD IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2f 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2f 0 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2f 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1la2f 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 1a2 15 IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the f
240. digest mechanism as detailed in RFC 3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol SIP Servers SIP is a client server protocol A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests A SIP server responds to the SIP requests When you use SIP to make a VoIP call it originates at a client and terminates at a server A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 251 Chapter 21 Voice SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls This means that SIP can be used for peer to peer communications even though it is a client server protocol In the following figure either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call Figure 151 SIP User Agent ESSEN M EL SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C 1 The client device A in the figure sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server B 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C B t Figure 152 SIP Proxy Server SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address b
241. ds out a particular service The Device forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service This is the first port number that identifies a service Open End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service Open Proto This is the open transport layer protocol Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 4 1 Add Edit Port Triggering Rule This screen lets you create new port triggering rules Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering screen or click a rule s Edit icon to open the following screen Figure 88 Port Triggering Add Edit Active Service Name WAN Interface Trigger Start Port Trigger End Port Trigger Protocol Open Start Port Open End Port Open Protocol ADSL R TCP TCP E ee The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Port Triggering Configuration Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to enable this rule Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters A Z a z 1 2 and so on WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules Trigger Start Port The trigger port is a port or a range
242. ducing the Device 1 1 Overview The Device is a wireless VDSL router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway It has a DSL port and a Gigabit Ethernet port for super fast Internet access The Device supports both Packet Transfer Mode PTM and Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM It is backward compatible with ADSL ADSL2 and ADSL2 in case VDSL is not available Only use firmware for your Device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device The Device has two USB ports for sharing files via a USB storage device sharing a USB printer or connecting a 3G dongle for a WAN backup connection The Device works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service 1 2 Ways to Manage the Device Use any of the following methods to manage the Device Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a supported web browser TR 069 This is an auto configuration server used to remotely configure your device 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Device Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if th
243. duction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In Multi Tenant Unit MTU applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the
244. dvances Settings Geewices Select the services running on pour ralak that inleme users can eae Seraces Fa msrasor 132 1EE 1 GS G618 16609 TCP memege 192 169 155 9853 27111 UDP msmses 192 168 1 01 7201 26007 UDP v mems 192 168 1 01 7810 31 711 TCF Service Settings Description of service Tes Name or IP address for example 192 158 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TEP C UDP Internal Port number for this service 143 Cancel 5 When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray J Internet Connection is now connected Click here For more information VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Y Internet Connection Status General Internet Gateway Status Duration Speed Activity Internet x Packets Sent Received Connected 00 00 56 100 0 Mbps My Computer y Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP address of the Device first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device
245. e Properties VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 6 Right click on the icon for your Device and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the Device Internet Sharing Gateway General EVA m d Sue M ntemmet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer Model Name Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Description Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 7 The Additional Subnet Screen Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The Device supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface with the Device itself as the gateway for the LAN network When you use IP alias you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN s logical network subnet If your ISP provides the Public LAN service the Device may use an LAN IP address that can be accessed from the WAN Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Additional Subnet to display the screen shown next Figure 59 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Additional Subnet IP Alias Setup Group Name Defaut Active 7 IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Public LAN Active Iv IP Address 0 0 0
246. e VBR nRT connections The VBR RT real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth a PCR is specified but is only available when data is being sent An example of an VBR RT connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics The VBR nRT non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation It is commonly used for bursty traffic typical on LANs PCR and MBS define the burst levels SCR defines the minimum level An example of an VBR nRT connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers However UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth An example application is background file transfer IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway Intro
247. e the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD the Device generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection Echo Cancellation G 168 is an ITU T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk MWI Message Waiting Indication Enable Message Waiting Indication MWI enables your phone to give you a message waiting beeping dial tone when you have a voice message s Your VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Custom Tones IVR IVR Interactive Voice Response is a feature that allows you to use your telephone to interact with the Device The Device allows you to record custom tones for the Early Media and Music On Hold functions The same recordings apply to both the caller ringing and on hold tones Table 121 Custom Tones Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Total Time for All Tones 900 seconds for all custom tones combined Maximum Time per 180 seconds Individual Tone Total Number of Tones 5 Recordable You can record up to 5 different custom tones but the total time must be 900 seconds
248. e you need to ask your network administrator For the appropriate IP settings Use the Following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the Following DNS server addresses Advanced cancel 10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window 11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 12 Close the Network Connections window 13 Turn on your Device and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab VMG8924 B10A User s Guide EB Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP I P to open the TCP IP Control Panel Figure 213 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer D Apple System Profiler E Calculator Chooser Control Panels i Favorites Key Caps GH Network Browser GA Recent Applications i Recent Documents cif Remote Access Status Scrapbook P Sherlock 2 jj Speakable Items ADSL Control and Status Appearance Apple Menu Options AppleTalk ColorSync Control Strip Date amp Time DialAssist
249. e Device Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device Turn on your computer and the Device Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway es VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 2 Right click the icon and select Properties s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q sak di Q 5 PO search Folders Ez Address Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device i Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this Disable LANorH Status Create Shortcut Delete a al Rename Properties In the Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using amp J Internet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Show icon in notification area when connected VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 117 Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings A
250. e NETMASK followed by the subnet mask The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192 168 1 10 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Figure 222 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE eth0 ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO static IPADDR 192 168 1 10 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 347 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es enter the DNS server information in the resolv conf file in the etc directory The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified Figure 223 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf nameserver 172 23 5 1 nameserver 172 23 5 2 3 After you edit and save the configuration files you must restart the network card Enter network restart in the etc rc d init d directory The following figure shows an example Figure 224 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card root localhost init d network restart Shutting down interface eth0 Shutting down loopback interface Setting network parameters Bringing up loopback interface Bringing up interface eth0 oOOOoOoOo ROR ROR N Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP IP properties Figure 225 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties root localhost ifconfig eth0 L
251. e Trusted CA Screen Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the following screen This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as trusted The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 19 Certificates being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Figure 131 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA Import Certificate B note Maximum 4 certificates can be stored The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 99 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Import Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification Certificate authority that you trust to the Device This is the index number of the entry Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN OU Organizational Unit or department Organization O State ST and Country C It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate M
252. e application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving an
253. e auto configuration server ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto configuration server ACS User Name Enter the TR 069 user name for authentication with the auto configuration server ACS Password Enter the TR 069 password for authentication with the auto configuration server WAN Interface Select a WAN interface through which the TR 069 traffic passes used by TR 069 client If you select Any WAN the Device automatically passes the TR 069 traffic when any WAN connection is up If you select Multi WAN you also need to select two or more pre configured WAN interfaces The Device automatically passes the TR 069 traffic when one of the selected WAN connections is up Display SOAP Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console messages on serial console Connection Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS Request Authentication Connection Enter the connection request user name Request User Name When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device this user name is used to authenticate the ACS Connection Enter the connection request password Request Password When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device this password is used to authenticate the ACS Connection This shows the connection request URL Request URL The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the Device Local cer
254. e device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Device You could simply restore your last configuration VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1 4 Applications for the Device Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited 1 4 1 Internet Access Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or VDSL The Device cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time Note The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN layer 2 interfaces that you configure in the Device Refer to Section 5 2 on page 47 for the Network Setting gt Broadband screen Computers can connect to the Device s LAN ports or wirelessly Figure 1 Device s Internet Access Application WAN Bridging LAN WAN Bridging PPPoE IPoE PPPoA IPoA gt LAN You can also configure IP filtering on the Device for secure Internet access When the IP filter is on all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely b
255. e line and to set up the phones you connect to the Device Use the SIP Account screen Section 21 3 on page 234 to set up information about your SIP account control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the Device use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the Device Use the SIP Service Provider screen Section 21 4 on page 239 to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan Use the PhoneRegion screen Section 21 5 on page 247 to change settings that depend on the country you are in Use the Call Rule screen Section 21 6 on page 247 to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently used VoIP phone numbers Use the Call History Summary screen Section 21 7 on page 248 to view the summary list of received dialed and missed calls Use the Call History Outgoing screen Section 21 8 on page 249 to view detailed information for each outgoing call you made Use the Call History Incoming screen Section 21 9 on page 249 to view detailed information for each incoming call from someone calling you You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account In fact if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen it is usually best to leave it at its default setting VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 233 Chapter 21 Voice 21 1 2 What You Need to Know Abo
256. e the wall when drilling holes for the screws 4 Align and insert the bracket to the wall mounting notches on the rear panel of the Device VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 5 Push the bracket up to tightly attach it to the Device 6 Mount the Device on the screws which are already installed on the wall Make sure that the Device is firmly attached to the screws so it does not fall off VMG8924 B10A User s Guide The Web Configurator 2 1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default See Appendix C on page 357 if you need to make sure these functions are all
257. e their IPv6 addresses Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6 is defined in RFC 4443 ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58 which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4 ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6 IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions such as ping Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP The Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP is a protocol used to discover other I Pv6 devices and track neighbor s reachability in a network An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types Neighbor solicitation A request from a host to determine a neighbor s link layer address MAC address and detect if the neighbor is still reachable A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message from the host with a neighbor advertisement message VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 Neighbor advertisement A response from a node to announce its link layer address Router solicitation A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets Router advertisement A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache destination cache prefix list and default router list The Device
258. e to log in from another interface check the service control settings for HTTP and HTTPS Maintenance Remote MGMT 322 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Device with the default IP address See Section 1 6 on page 22 6 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser Try to access the Device using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Device check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Device 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly The default admin password is 1234 The field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device Log out of the Device in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out 3 Turn the Device off and on 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 41 1 on page 321 cannot Telnet to the Device See the troubleshooting suggestions
259. echniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth SIP The Session Initiation Protocol SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit switched telephone networks SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity sometimes referred to as a SIP address A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI Uniform Resource Identifier A SIP account s URI identifies the SIP account in a VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice way similar to the way an e mail address identifies an e mail account The format of a SIP identity is SIP Number SIP Service Domain SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the symbol A SIP number can use letters like in an e mail address johndoe your ITSP com for example or numbers like a telephone number 1122334455 VolP provider com for example SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI For example if the SIP address is 11223344559 Vol P provider com then Vol P provider com is the SIP service domain SIP Registration Each
260. ect what you want the Device to do to the IEEE 802 1q VLAN ID and priority tags of downstream traffic before sending it out through this LAN port Unchange Don t do anything to the traffic s VLAN ID and priority tags Add Add VLAN ID and priority tags to untagged traffic Remove Delete one tag from tagged traffic If the frame has double tags this removes the outer tag This does not affect untagged traffic Remark Change the value of the outer VLAN ID and priority tags 802 1P Mark Use this option to set what to do for the IEEE 802 1p priority tags when you add or remark the tags for a LAN port s downstream traffic Either select Unchange to not modify the traffic s priority tags or select an priority from O to 7 to use The larger the number the higher the priority VLAN ID If you will add or remark tags for this LAN port s downstream traffic specify the VLAN ID from 0 to 4094 to use here Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 7 11 The Wake on LAN Screen Use this screen to turn on a device on the LAN network To use this feature the remote device must also support Wake On LAN You need to know the MAC address of the LAN device It may be on a label on the device or in its documentation Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Wake on Lan to open this screen Figure 63 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Wake on Lan
261. ecture IPSec Algorithms ESP Protocol AH Protocol RFC 2406 RFC 2402 Authentication Algorithm HMAC MD5 RFC 2403 HMAC SHA 1 RFC 2404 IPSec Algorithms The ESP Encapsulating Security Payload Protocol RFC 2406 and AH Authentication Header protocol RFC 2402 describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure including implementation algorithms The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES Data Encryption Standard and Triple DES algorithms The Authentication Algorithms HMAC MD5 RFC 2403 and HMAC SHA 1 RFC 2404 provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols Key Management Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE ISAKMP or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN 20 5 2 Encapsulation The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode At the time of writing the Device supports Tunnel mode only Figure 139 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation Original IP TCP Data IP Packet Header Header Transport Mode IPSec IP TCP Data Protected Packet Header Header Header Tunnel Mode IP IPSec IP TCP Data Protected Packet Header Header Header Header VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 227 Chapter 20 VPN 20 5 3 Transport Mode Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet In Tr
262. ed mode networks networks with Protection both IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g traffic Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS CTS handshake This helps improve IEEE 802 11g performance Select Off to disable 802 11 protection The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced in a mixed mode network This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802 11 Mode to 802 11b Only Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop down list box Choices are Long or Short See Section 6 10 7 on page 97 for more information This field is configurable only when you set 802 11 Mode to 802 11b RIFS Select Auto to enable the Reduced Inter frame Spacing RIFS feature It improves the Device s performance by reducing the amount of dead time required between OFDM transmissions Select Off to disable the feature WPS 2 0 Select this to support WPS 2 0 which enhances WPS security and flexibility on configuration RX Chain Power Save Select Enable to activate the RX Chain Power Save feature It turns off one of the Receive chains to save power when it is not in use Select Disabled to disable this feature XPress M Technology Select Enable for higher speeds especially if you have both IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g wireless clients The wireless clients do not have to support XPress Technology although the performance enhancement is greater if they do Select Disabled to disable this fea
263. ed to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults 6 10 9 4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information Figure 52 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR dL lt 4 D SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the network AP1 supplies the existing security informa
264. eds 315 40 2 What Yon Need To KNOW 2 ossia teta ids o Pod TIode PRI Idea qu po Deque Se esae A A AA 315 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 13 Table of Contents 20 2 Fng oe Trecebluuie d MS LOOK uon aat EE POPUD FL pa rra aga t gi RP bra an RR He Rat raa a atus 316 RUE 90S VA ascxderbissxi ias ceannvesgs T Dod Dae E O ONU lad A ONDES D RU AA DRE EEUU eC RUN CURE UI 317 SUD OANEI ciena pe reste Ru ctii aeiecesetee rat bp sco eben ER est ep acts cae ieee 318 Chapter 41 Troubleshoot PR 321 41 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS eiie seriei enki na tt n ait kic 321 Ai Derice Actass Eis o D SET 322 Aa OMSL o em S 324 21 2 Wireless Menel ACESS occidi eo tb v REB a a TRU R RR tU VE Ev PR US euR I EORR Lr IM Yap oru Eu d 325 PoU E CI NS rime 326 AE BIPHE anian anaes 326 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address cccseseceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeensaeeesessneneeeeeeaaeeee 327 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting oosdeidbi eid iske ilb o beb dada b inb PSP bL prb ER TWEE SUE M A eduista 349 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions ssssssseeesess 357 tes pro Wireless LANS REOR a ee ENSre A aE Perey eee rer ee Deemer ee ee ere 367 BREAD aa E ao Mee ee ee eee EI dM EI LE eee E DL 381 Append e 2S PROTEUS um ET UN ear 389 Appendix G Legal Information cece eee E 393 La E E E E E A E 397 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide PART User s Guide Intro
265. een your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server the Account Status field displays Not Registered Click Register to have the Device attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server The button is grayed out if the SIP account is disabled VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens Table4 Status Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Account Status This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use Vol P Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account Not Registered The last time the Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed Use the Register button to register the account again The Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the Device or when you activate it Registered The SIP account is already registered with the SIP server You can use it to make a VoIP call Service Provider This column displays the service provider name and SIP number for each SIP account URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in the VoIP gt SIP screens VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens VMG8924
266. electric motors cordless phones and other wireless devices To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection you can Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles such as walls and ceilings between the AP and the wireless client Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously or add additional APs if necessary Try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information it may have too many programs open that use the Internet What is a Server Set ID SSID An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network The AP and all the clients within a wireless network must use the same SSID VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 41 5 USB Device Connection The Device fails to detect my USB device 1 Disconnect the USB device 2 Reboot the Device 3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on 4 Re connect your USB device to the Device 41 6 UPnP When using UPnP and the Device reboots my computer cannot detect UP
267. elete the route VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 8 Routing 8 2 1 Add Edit Static Route Use this screen to add or edit a static route Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit The screen shown next appears Figure 67 Routing Add Edit Active Route Name hh IP Type ipv4 Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask ooo Use Gateway IP Address Enable C Disable Gateway IP Address Use Interface ADSL atm0 OK Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Routing Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Select this to enable the static route Clear this to disable this static route without having to delete the entry Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6 Destination IP Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination Address IP Subnet Mask If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Enter the IP subnet mask here Use Gateway IP The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN Address port The gateway helps fo
268. en to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication security settings More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device MAC Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices Authentication of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the Device WPS Use this screen to configure and view your WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup settings WMM Use this screen to enable or disable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System WDS links to other access points Others Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings Channel Status Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Home LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP settings and other advanced Networking properties Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses UPnP Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT T on or off Additional Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP Subnet STB Vendor ID Use this screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box STB devices when they request IP addresses 5th Ethernet port Use this screen to configure the role of the WAN port It can be either the Ethernet WAN or a LAN port LAN VLAN Wake on Lan Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and I EEE 802 1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports
269. en without saving 12 2 2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following screen Figure 104 Interface Grouping Criteria Criteria C Source MAC Address C DHCP option 60 Enable wildcard on DHCP option 60 DHCP option 61 IAD DUID type 5 DHCP option 125 Enterprise Number Manufacturer OUI Product Class Model Name Serial Number Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 75 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL DESCRIPTION Source MAC Enter the source MAC address of the packet Address DHCP Option Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 of the matched traffic 60 such as the type of the hardware or firmware Enable Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for wildcard on DHCP option 60 DHCP option 60 option VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 12 Interface Group Table 75 Interface Grouping Criteria continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Option Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic 61 IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier IAID of the device for example the WAN connection index number DUID type Select DUI D LLT DUID Based on Link layer Address Plus Time to enter the hardware type a time v
270. entering a static IP address on the LAN behind your Device Then enter the subnet mask to identify the network address IP Subnetmask If Subnet is selected enter the subnet mask to identify the network address Tunnel access from remote IP addresses Select Single Address to have only one remote LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel Select Subnet to specify remote LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask IP Address for VPN If Single Address is selected enter a static IP address on the LAN behind the remote I PSec s router If Subnet is selected specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by entering a static IP address on the LAN behind the remote IPSec s router Then enter the subnet mask to identify the network address IP Subnetmask If Subnet is selected enter the subnet mask to identify the network address Protocol Select which protocol you want to use in the IPSec SA Choices are AH RFC 2402 provides integrity authentication sequence integrity replay resistance and non repudiation but not encryption If you select AH you must select an I ntegraty Algorithm ESP RFC 2406 provides encryption and the same services offered by AH but its authentication is weaker If you select ESP you must select an Encryption Agorithm and Integraty Algorithm Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and latency delay The Device and remote IPSec router must use the same active pr
271. er 40 Diagnostic 40 5 OAM Ping Click Maintenance Diagnostic OAM Ping to open the screen shown next Use this screen to perform an OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC The Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the Device The test result then displays in the text box ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows Virtual Channel VC Logical connections between ATM devices e Virtual Path VP A bundle of virtual channels Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points Figure 192 Virtual Circuit Topology Virtual Circuit End to End K ATM Switch Virtual Path Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points In an ATM cell header a VPI Virtual Path Identifier identifies a link formed by a virtual path a VCI Virtual Channel Identifier identifies a channel within a virtual path A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit F4 cells operate at the virtual path VP level while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel VC level F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections but use different predefined VCI values F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC c
272. er of the entry Name This is the service name of the connection Type This shows whether it is an ATM Ethernet or a PTM connection Mode This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection 802 1p This indicates the 802 1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no priority level assigned 802 1q This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned IGMP Proxy This shows whether the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection Default This shows whether the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system Gateway default gateway IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection IPv6 is not available when the connection uses the bridging service MLD Proxy This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery MLD is activated or not for this connection MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 5 2 1 Add Edit Internet Connection Click Add New WAN Interface in the Broadband
273. ervice s Add new service Blocked Site URL Keyword Add Delete Apply Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 17 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 93 Parental Control Rule Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule Parental Enter a descriptive name for the rule Control Profile Name Home Network User Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop down list box If you select Custom enter the LAN user s MAC address If you select All the rule applies to all LAN users Internet Access Schedule Day Time Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access Network Service Network Service Setting If you select Block the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below If you select Allow the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below Add new Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule You can configure the service Service Name Protocol and Name of the new rule This shows the index number of the rule Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it Service Name This shows the name of the rule Protocol Port This shows
274. erview Power management allows you to turn on off one or more interfaces and all LED lights without power off the whole system when necessary You can configure a schedule to do so automatically or manually do it on the Web Configurator 14 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Power Management screen to manually turn on off interface s and or LEDs Section 14 2 on page 191 Use the Auto Switch Off screen to configure schedules for turning on off interface s and or LEDs automatically Section 14 3 on page 192 14 1 2 What You Need To Know These screens are only available for the supervisor user The Power Management and Auto Switch Off screens are dependant You can only configure the on off switches of the same interface and LEDs in one of the two screens 14 2 The Power Management Screen Use this screen to manually turn on off interface s or LEDs Click Network Setting Power Management Power Management The screen appears as shown Figure 111 Network Setting gt Power Management Manually Switch On Off DSL WAN POWER ON OPOWER OFF Ethernet WAN POWER ON OPOWER OFF LAN Port 1 POWERON OPOWER OFF LAN Port 2 POWERON OPOWER OFF LAN Port 3 POWERON OPOWER OFF LAN Port 4 POWERON OPOWER OFF LED POWERON OPOWER OFF VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 14 Power Management Each field is described in the following table Table 81 Network Setting gt Power Management
275. ery 5 30 Second kPackets per month 2 5 times Reset all budget counters on day of month Host Name or IP address Actions before over budget Enable of time budge Enable of data budget Mbytes Enable of data budget Packets Actions when over budget Current 3G connection Optional Actions Optional Optional Only for unlock PIN next time PIN remaining authentication times N A 99 mernet erval minutes NaledUP v Enable Log Interval minutes BD Note Budget Control is an approximate value Basic IP address Apply Cancel Entering the wrong PIN code 3 times wil lock SIM card The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup LABEL DESCRIPTION General 3G Backup Select Enable to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails Ping Check Select Enable if you want the Device to ping check the connection status of your WAN You can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before triggering 3G backup Check Cycle Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field Consecutive PI NG Fail Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered Ping Default Gateway Select this to have the Device ping the WAN interface s default gateway IP address Ping the Host Select this to h
276. ess points must use the same WEP key VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 76 Note WEP is extremely insecure Its encryption can be broken by an attacker using widely available software It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support For example use WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK if all your wireless devices support it or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP use the highest encryption level available Note WEP encryption is not available when using the 5 GHz frequency band Your Device allows you to configure up to four 64 bit or 128 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network Setting gt Wireless to display the General screen then select Basic as the security level Figure 35 Wireless gt General Basic WEP Security Level Basic v v v o Security Mode WEP IV Generate password automatically 64 bit Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hex characters 0 9 4 F 128 bit Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hex characters 0 9 A F Select one password as your active password Password 1 NIA less C Password 2 N A C Password 3 N A C Password 4 N A WEP Encryption 128 bit gt The
277. ess the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 373 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as
278. esses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc This is the index number of the entry MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device Delete Click the Delete icon to delete the entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 5 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup WPS on your Device WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Set up each WPS connection between two devices Both devices must support WPS See Section 6 10 9 3 on page 100 for more information about WPS Note The Device applies the security settings of the SSI D1 profile see Section 6 2 on page 72 If you want to use the WPS feature make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA2 PSK or No Security Click Network Setting Wireless WPS The following screen displays Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen Figure 41 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS WPS Setup WPS Disabled The settings in this screen are invalid if you select this i Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 j vl ely Pus
279. estore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice 21 4 2 Dial Plan Rules A dial plan defines the dialing patterns such as the length and range of the digits for a telephone number It also includes country codes access codes area codes local numbers long distance numbers or international call prefixes For example the dial plan 2 9 xxxxxx does not allow a local number which begins with 1 or 0 Without a dial plan users have to manually enter the whole callee s number and wait for the specified dialing interval to time out or press a terminator key usually the pound key on the phone keypad before the Device makes the call The Device initializes a call when the dialed number matches any one of the rules in the dial plan Dial plan rules follow these conventions The collection of rules is in parentheses Rules are separated by the bar symbol X stands for a wildcard and can be any digit from O to 9 A subset of keys is in a square bracket Ranges are allowed For example 359 means a number matching this rule can be 3 5 or 9 26 8 means a number matching this rule can be 2 6 7 8 or The dot appended to a digit allows the digit to be ignored or repeated multiple times Any digit 0 9 after the dot will be ignored For example 01 means a number matching this rule can be O 01 0111 01111 and so on e dialed number translated
280. et Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens the General tab f you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically f you have a static IP address click Use the following I P address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Click Advanced Figure 210 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator For the appropriate IP settings Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties 9 General Alternate Configuration 5 Use the Following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the Following DNS server addresses Advanced Cancel 8 Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway A
281. etter audio quality than narrowband codecs like G 711 in which the voice signal is sampled at 8 KHz The Device must use the same codec as the peer When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec Select the Device s first choice for voice coder decoder Select the Device s second choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the Device to accept the first choice Select the Device s third choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the Device to accept the first or second choice Speaking Volume Control Select the loudness that the Device uses for speech that it sends to the peer device 12 is the quietest and 12 is the loudest Listening Volume Control Select the loudness that the Device uses for speech that it receives from the peer device 12 is the quietest and 12 is the loudest Enable G 168 Echo Cancellation Enable VAD Voice Active Detector Call Features Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk Select this if the Device should stop transmitting when you are not speaking This reduces the bandwidth the Device uses VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 237 Chapter 21 Voice Table 111 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Send Caller ID Select this if you want to sen
282. evice on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidel
283. ey Exchange negotiation phase 1 Authentication and phase 2 Key Exchange A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Figure 140 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA Phasel In phase 1 you must Choose a negotiation mode Authenticate the connection by entering a pre shared key Choose an encryption algorithm Choose an authentication algorithm Choose a Diffie Hellman public key cryptography key group Set the IKE SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established the IPSec SA stays connected In phase 2 you must e Choose an encryption algorithm e Choose an authentication algorithm Choose a Diffie Hellman public key cryptography key group e Set the IPSec SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay up before it times out The Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires If an IPSec SA times out then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic 20 5 4 Negotiation Mode The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security Association SA will be established for each
284. ey combinations that you can enter to turn the unconditional call forward function off VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Table 113 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION No Answer Call Forward Enable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward incoming calls to the phone number you specified in the SIP SIP Account screen if the calls are unanswered No Answer Call Forward Disable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn the no answer call forward function off Call Forward Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward incoming calls to the phone Waiting Disable Do Not Disturb Enable When Busy number you specified in the SIP SIP Account screen if the phone port is busy Enable Call Forward Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn the busy forward function off When Busy Disable One Shot Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to activate call waiting on the next calls Waiting Enable One Shot Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to deactivate call waiting on the next call only Enter the key combinations that you can enter to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you Do Not Disturb Disable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn this function off Call Completion Enter the key combinations t
285. f this SSID to WAN 2 Max Downstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of WAN to this SSID 3 If Max Upstream Downstream Bandwidth is empty the CPE sets the value automatically BSSID 52 43 F6 40 49 FF E mail notification when the wireless guest visit v Enable Email Notification Mail Server v Email Title Send Notification to Email Security Level More Secure Recommended VAIO C D v w ww O Security Mode WPA2 PSK C Generate password automatically Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z 0 9 and other characters are not allowed Password e000000000000000c0 MOTE CI password unmask The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 21 Network Setting gt Wireless gt More AP gt Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field Passphrase Passphrase type cannot be changed The default is None Type Wireless Network Settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 24 Network Setting gt Wireless gt More AP gt Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Name SSID The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to
286. face group Select Device Info Select a device or computer from the drop down list or select Manual I nput to manually enter a device s MAC address and IP address in the following fields MAC Address If you select Manual I nput enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN IP Address If you select Manual I nput enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 7 4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use See page 106 for more information on UPnP Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP to display the screen shown next Figure 58 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP UPnP State UPnP UPnP NAT T State UPnP NAT T B Note UPnP NATT only work when NAT is enable Enable C Disable Enable Disable VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking
287. face group 177 Internet wizard setup 33 Internet access 18 wizard setup 33 Internet Key Exchange 228 Internet Protocol version 6 45 Internet Protocol version 6 see IPv6 Internet Service Provider see ISP IP address 106 127 ping 316 private 127 WAN 45 IP Address Assignment 67 IP alias NAT applications 171 IPSec algorithms 227 architecture 226 NAT 230 IPSec VPN 219 IPv6 45 381 addressing 45 69 381 EUI 64 383 global address 382 interface ID 383 link local address 381 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 381 ping 381 prefix 46 69 381 prefix delegation 47 prefix length 46 69 381 unspecified address 382 ISP 44 iTunes server 188 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Index ITU T 256 K key combinations 262 keypad 262 L LAN 105 and USB printer 190 client list 111 DHCP 106 126 DNS 106 126 IP address 106 107 127 MAC address 111 status 39 subnet mask 106 107 127 LAND attack 196 LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration 295 LBR 315 limitations wireless LAN 96 WPS 103 link trace 315 Link Trace Message see LTM Link Trace Response see LTR listening port 243 login 25 passwords 25 26 logs 265 269 279 285 305 Loop Back Response see LBR loopback 315 LTM 315 LTR 315 MA 315 MAC address 84 111 filter 84 94 MAC authentication 84 Mac filter 203 Maintenance Association see MA Maintenance Domain see MD Maintenance End Point see MEP Management Information Base MIB 297 managing the device good
288. following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1 AP 1 has no wired Internet connection but it can VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless establish a WDS link with access point AP 2 which has a wired Internet connection When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2 the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2 Figure 49 WDS Link Example INTERNE 6 10 9 WiFi Protected Setup WPS Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves 6 10 9 1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a
289. for Service Set Dentifier VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless f two wireless networks overlap they should use a different channel Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Radio Channels In the radio spectrum there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed civilian use For the purposes of wireless networking these bands are divided into numerous channels This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another When you create a network you must select a channel to use Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another the number of available channels also varies 6 10 2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Device s Web Configurator Table 28 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other s presence This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not
290. for user authentication EB VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM is a WAN networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed ATM uses a connection oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit VC between Finding Out More PTM Packet Transfer Mode PTM is packet oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard In PTM packets are encapsulated directly in the High level Data Link Control HDLC frames It is designed to provide a low overhead transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links as an alternative to ATM 3G 3G Third Generation is a digital packet switched wireless technology Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data It allows fast transfer of voice and non voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile
291. from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 379 Appendix D Wireless LANs VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Overview IPv6 IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1038 IP addresses IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2f 0000 can be w
292. g up the receiver when you are done Quality of Service QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real time multimedia applications Type of Service ToS Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS Type of Service values at the data source for example at the Device so a server can decide the best method of delivery that is the least cost fastest route and so on DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCP indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backw
293. generally considered stronger than MD5 but it is also slower Select Diffie Select which Diffie Hellman key group you want to use for encryption keys Choices for number of bits in the random number are 768 1024 1536 2048 3072 4096 The longer the key the more secure the encryption but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information Both routers must use the same DH key group Key Life Time Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected Phase 2 Encryption Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA Choices are Algorithm DES a 56 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES a 168 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm AES 128 a 128 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES 192 a 196 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES 256 a 256 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm Select ESP NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption When you select ESP NULL you do not enter an encryption key The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm Longer keys require more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughpu
294. getting through By setting this value lower than the default value the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the Device The lower the value the more often the devices must get permission If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value see below then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device does it cannot communicate with the Device Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network Fragmentation A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks while a larger Threshold threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy 6 10 3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature radio communications are simple to intercept For wireless data networks this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves but also join the network Once an unauthorized person has access to the network he or she can steal information or introduce malware malicious software intended to compromise the network For these reasons a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a
295. gital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication 19 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the Device s CA signed certificates Section 19 4 on page 214 The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device Section 19 4 on page 214 19 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter Certification Authority A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification authority s public key to verify the certificates You can use the Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority 19 3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security gt Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen This is the Device s summary list of certificates and certification requests Figure 127 Security gt Certificates gt Local
296. gt Routing gt DNS Route screen The screen shown next appears DNS Route Add Add new DNS Route Figure 69 5x Domain Name Subnet Mask 255 255 255 255 Interface ADSL atm0 v VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 8 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 DNS Route Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name Enter the domain name of the DNS route entry Interface Select the WAN connection through which the Device forwards DNS requests for this domain name Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the DNS route entry OK Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes 8 4 The Policy Forwarding Screen Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet Policy forwarding allows the Device to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to outgoing packets prior to the normal routing You can use source based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing The Policy Forwarding screen let you view and configure routing policies on the Device Click Network Setting gt Routing gt Policy Fo
297. h Button Configuration Register Wireless Client PIN Number Enter AP s PIN Number in Wireless Client 1 Click Connect 1 Enter the PIN of your wireless client and Current state Configured click Register 1 Please release configuration if you want to configure the wireless settings 2 Activate WPS on the wireless client within Release Configuration 2 minutes after clicking Connect 2 Activate WPS on the wireless client within 2 minutes after clicking Connect 2 Enter current PIN 90053252 on your wireless client Generate New PIN Number B Notes 1 This function only works on the first SSID 2 Click the Release Configuration button to have the WPS status changed to Unconfigured Otherwise WPS status is in Configured mode The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Select Disabled to deactivate WPS on the Device Otherwise keep Disabled unselected Method 1 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration PBC Connect Click this button to add another WPS enabled wireless device within wireless range of the Device to your wireless network This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device or a menu button similar to the Connect button on this screen Note You must press the other wireless device s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button
298. hanges Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 7 1 WDS Scan You can click the Scan icon in Wireless gt WDS to have the Device automatically search and display the available APs within range Select an AP and click Apply to have the Device establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device Figure 44 WDS Scan Refresh Wireless Bridge Scan Setup 5200 LOC24G PSK 00 13 49 FE 1 1 01 5200 LOC24G WPA2 06 13 49 FE 11 01 EddyLab 00 13 49 31 63 06 Apply Cancel 88 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 WDS Scan LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Bridge Scan Setup Refresh Click Refresh to update the table This is the index number of the entry SSID This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range BSSID This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 8 The Others Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt Others The scre See Section 6 10 en appears as shown 2 on page 93 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen Figure 45 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Others 802 11 Protection Preamble
299. hat You Can Do in this Chapter The Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host Section 40 3 on page 316 The 802 1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions Section 40 5 on page 318 The OAM Ping screen lets you send an ATM OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC Section 40 5 on page 318 40 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter How CFM Works A Maintenance Association MA defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point MEP ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain MD level An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages CCMs and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices CCMs within an MA CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults Loopback test checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response LBR from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message LBM If no response is received there might be a connectivity fault between them Link trace test provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP this may indicate a fault Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report VMG8924 B10A U
300. hat you can enter to disable CCBS on a call on Busy Subscriber CCBS Deactivate Outgoing SIP Enter the key combinations that you can enter to select the SIP account that you use to make outgoing calls If you enter 12 by default SIP account index number 3 the phone number you want to call 1201 12345678 for example the Device uses the first SIP account to call 12345678 Dial Plan Dial Plan Select this to activate the dial plan rules you specify in the text box provided See Section Enable 21 4 2 on page 246 for how to set up a rule Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Enter the number of seconds the Device should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers If you select Immediate Dial Enable you can press the pound key to tell the Device to make the phone call immediately regardless of this setting Immediate Dial Enable Immediate Dial Enable Select this if you want to use the pound key to tell the Device to make the phone call immediately instead of waiting the number of seconds you selected in the Dialing Interval Selection field If you select this dial the phone number and then press the pound key The Device makes the call immediately instead of waiting You can still wait if you want Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to r
301. he DDNS settings on the Device Section 11 3 on page 175 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 173 Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup 11 1 2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS 11 2 The DNS Entry Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device Click Network Setting gt DNS to open the DNS Entry screen 174 Figure 98 Network Setting gt DNS gt DNS Entry Add new DNS entry est 192 168 1 56 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 70 Network Setting gt DNS gt DNS Entry LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new DNS Click this to create a new DNS entry entry This is the index number of the entry Hostname This indicates the host name or domain name IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup 11 2 1 Add Edit DNS Entry You can manually add or edit the Device s DNS name and IP address entry Click Add new DNS entry in the DNS Entr
302. he Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address e Select Get IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server IA NA if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix from an RA This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address automatically Select Prefix Delegation I A PD to use DHCP PD Prefix Delegation which enables the Device to pass the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses Select Static if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP Select None to not assign any IPv6 address to this WAN connection IPv6 Routing Fea WAN IPv6 Enter the IPv6 address assigned by your ISP Address Prefix Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address Length compose the network address Next Hop Enter the IP address of the next hop gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your Device s interface s The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations ture This is available only when you select I Pv6 IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section MLD Proxy Select this checkbox to h
303. he LAN interfaces in the group Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the group Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the group Add Click this button to create a new group 12 2 1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen Use this screen to create a new interface group 178 VMG8924 B10A Users Guide Chapter 12 Interface Group Note An interface can belong to only one group at a time Figure 103 Interface Group Configuration Group Name PTM type ATM type ETH type Add B Note WAN Interfaces used in the grouping Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDs If a vendor ID is configured for a specific client device please REBOOT the client device attached to the modem to allow itto obtain an appropriate IP address p None C VDSL ptm0 1 briptm0 2 C pppo3G pppo3G0 None C ADSL atmO pppo3G pppo3G0 None C pppo3G pppo3G0 LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 WL_ZyXEL05552 WL_VIP WL_Guest WL_ZyXEL05552_Guest3 0000 0000 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 74 Interface Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Name Enter a name to identify this group You can enter up to 30 characters You can use letters numbers hyphens and underscores Spaces are not allowed
304. he last port of the original destination port range To forward only one port enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above Translation This shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port Start Port For a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated Translation End Port This shows the last port of the translated port range Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here Address Protocol Select the protocol supported by this virtual server Choices are TCP UDP or TCP UDP Wake up this Select this and enter the MAC address of a LAN device if you want to turn the device on target by Wake On Lan WOL remotely from the Internet or the WAN network using this port forwarding rule MAC address of Enter the MAC address of the LAN device A MAC address consists of six hexadecimal WOL device character pairs OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 10 3 The Applications Screen This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration In addition this screen allows you to create new applications and or remove existing ones To access this screen
305. he network Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer Note Your printer s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer Connect your printer to the Device instead 13 4 2 The Printer Server Screen Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device To access this screen click Network Setting gt USB Service gt Printer Server Figure 110 Network Setting gt USB Service gt Printer Server Print Server Enable O Disable User Defined Printer Name PRINTER Maker and model PRINTER System Printer Name N A B Note To use the print server define a network printer with URL http 192 168 1 1 631 printers PRINTER Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 80 Network Setting gt USB Service gt Print Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Printer Server Select Enable to have the Device share a USB printer User Defined Type the name for the printer Printer Name Maker and Type up to 80 characters for the manufacturer and model number of the printer model System Printer This field shows the printer s system name the Device has detected from one of the USB Name ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 190 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Power Management 14 1 Ov
306. her the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload mapping NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your Device filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 10 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses
307. hese two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network
308. his field is the shortest expiration time that the Device accepts Phone Key Enter the key combinations for certain functions of the SIP phone Config Call Return Enter the key combinations that you can enter to place a call to the last number that called you One Shot Caller Enter the key combinations that you can enter to activate caller ID for the next call only Display Call One Shot Caller Enter the key combinations that you can enter to deactivate caller ID for the next call only Hidden Call Call Waiting Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn on the call waiting function Enable Call Waiting Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn off the call waiting function Disable IVR Enter the key combinations that you can enter to record custom caller ringing tones the sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone and on hold tones the sound someone hears when you put their call on hold IVR stands for Interactive Voice Response Internal Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to call the phone s connected to the Device Call Transfer Enter the key combinations that you can enter to transfer a call to another phone Unconditional Call Forward Enable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward all incoming calls to the phone number you specified in the SIP SIP Account screen Unconditional Call Forward Disable Enter the k
309. hows how tokens work with packets A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet in bytes After a packet is transmitted a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket f there are no tokens in the bucket the Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated f not enough tokens are available the Device treats the packet in either one of the following Ways In traffic shaping Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket In traffic policing Drops it Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark The Device may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded Li VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface s capability The smaller the bucket size the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size For example use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker srTCM defined in RFC 2697 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user defined rate the Commi
310. ia Library Path Imnt usb1 1 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 79 Network Setting gt USB Service gt Media Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Media Server Select Enable to have the Device function as a DLNA compliant media server Enable the media server to let DLNA compliant media clients on your network play media files located in the shares Interface Select an interface on which you want to enable the media server function Media Library Enter the path clients use to access the media files on a USB storage device connected to Path the Device Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 13 4 Printer Server The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP IP port on the computers connected to your network 13 4 1 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network The USB printer must be connected to your Device VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 189 Chapter 13 USB Service e A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP IP port for printing via t
311. ic significantly Apply as Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system Default default gateway Gateway DNS Server This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or IPv6 IPv4 DualStack in the I Pv6 IPv4 Mode field DNS Select Dynamic if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP Select Static if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually DNS Server 1 Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS Server 2 Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP WAN MAC Address Factory Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address Default Clone the Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are computer s cloning It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ases IP ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication Address Set WAN Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use MAC Address Tunnel This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or I Pv6 Only in the I Pv6 IPv4 Mode field The DS Lite Dual Stack Lite fields display when you set the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field to IPv6 Only Enable Dual Stack Lite to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISP s IPv6 network See Dual Stack Lite on page 47 for more information The 6RD IPv6
312. ication using the default 80 bit tag DTMF Mode DTMF Mode Control how the Device handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses RFC2833 send the DTMF tones in RTP packets PCM send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression like G 729 and G 726 can distort the tones SIP INFO send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Transport Type Transport Type Select the transport layer protocol UDP or TCP usually UDP used for SIP VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Table 113 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Ignore Direct IP Select Enable to have the connected CPE devices accept SIP requests only from the SIP proxy register server specified above SIP requests sent from other IP addresses will be ignored FAX Option This field controls how the Device handles fax messages G711 Fax Select this if the Device should use G 711 to send fax messages You have to also select Passthrough which operating codec G 711Mulaw or G 711Alaw to use for encoding decoding FAX data The peer devices must use the same settings T38 Fax Relay Select this if the Device should send fax messages as UDP or TCP IP packets through
313. ick Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x to display the following screen Figure 29 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x 802 1x Authentication List 1 2 N A N A EAP TLS NO N A N A N A N A EAP TLS NO N A N A B Note You need to add WAN interface first and you can modify authentication rules The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Network Setting gt Network Setting gt 802 1x Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the authentication is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this authentication is active A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active Interface This is the interface that uses the authentication This displays N A when there is no interface assigned EAP Identity This shows the EAP identity of the authentication This displays N A when there is no EAP identity assigned EAP method This shows the EAP method used in the authentication This displays N A when there is no EAP method assigned Bidirectional This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed Certificate This shows the certificate used for this authentication This displays N A when there is no certificate assigned Trusted CA This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication This displays N A when there is no Trusted CA assigned Apply Cli
314. icrosoft Windows 95 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Macintosh OS X 13 1 3 Before You Begin Make sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on 1 Connect the USB device to one of the Device s USB port Make sure the Device is connected to your network 2 The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on Note If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device see the troubleshooting for suggestions VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 13 USB Service 13 2 The File Sharing Screen Use this screen to set up file sharing through the Device The Device s LAN users can access the shared folder or share from the USB device inserted in the Device To access this screen click Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing Figure 106 Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing Information usb1 1 7640 1709 Server Configuration File Sharing Services 9 Enable O Disable Host Name Gateway Share Directory List Add New Share 7 usb1 1 usb1 1 usbi 1 ZW v paz dir2 usb1 1 dir2 usb directory 2 W v Si dir3 usb1_1 dir3 usb directory 3 ZW Account Management Add New User wat usb1
315. ield is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field If you select Mark enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets If you select Unchange the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets 802 1P Mark Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802 1p priority field in the packets If you select Unchange the Device keep the 802 1p priority field in the packets VLAN ID If you select Remark enter a VLAN ID number with which the Device replaces the VLAN ID of the frames If you select Remove the Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out If you select Add the Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID If you select Unchange the Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets Forward to Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out If you select Interface Unchange the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 50 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 9 6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen Use this screen to conf
316. ient version 0 7 2 Path to executable C Program Files DHCPv6Client_dibbler dibbler client exe service d C NPr Startup type Automatic x Service status Stopped Ca You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameters Lok DL cancel 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer To enable IPv6 in Windows 7 1 Select Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center gt Local Area Connection 2 Select the I nternet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 checkbox to enable it 3 Click OK to save the change VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 387 Appendix E IPv6 Networking Connect using amp Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items o Client for Microsoft Networks 4 Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Install Uninstal Properties Description TCP IP version 6 The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks pos 4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen 5 Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address This example sh
317. ific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e mail IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of MAP4 that runs over SSL IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NetBI OS TCP UDP 137 The Network Basic Input Output System is used for communication between TCP UDP 138 computers in a LAN TCP UDP 139 TCP UDP 445 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix F Services Table 171 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure ve
318. ifier identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile Guest WLAN This displays if the guest WLAN function has been enabled for this WLAN If Home Guest displays clients can connect to each other directly If External Guest displays clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly N A displays if guest WLAN is disabled Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 3 1 Edit More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen The following screen displays Figure 39 Network Setting gt Wireless gt More AP gt Edit Wireless Network Setup Wireless Enable C Disable The settings in this screen are invalid if you selectthis Passphrase Type None z Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID EyXEL05552 Guest Max clients 64 Hide SSID rH Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Iv Guest WLAN Access Scenario Home Guest Max Upstream Bandwidth Kbps Max Downstream Bandwidth Kbps B Notes 1 Max Upstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth o
319. ighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable it starts the address resolution process This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery MLD protocol defined in RFC 2710 is derived from IPv4 s Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 IGMPv2 MLD uses I CMPv6 message types rather than IGMP message types MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3 MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4 MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group it sends an MLD Report message for that address An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group it can send a Done message to the router or switch The router or switch then sends a group specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Ea Appendix E IPv6
320. ign to the authentication You need to import the certificate in the Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 5 6 The WAN Status Screen Click Network Setting gt Broadband gt Wan Status to open this screen Use this screen to query and view the historical traffic transmission rate for a WAN interface in a bar chart N A displays if the specified WAN interface was disconnected at that time VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Figure 31 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Wan Status Interface ADSL v Direction RX v Time Interval Minute v Scan E Unconnected Connected Flow Rate KB s 43 9 ma 201 461 444 149 4 9 109 086 10 147 220 mmo 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 5 60 History Min The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Wan Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Select a WAN interface to see its historical traffic transmission rate in the chart Direction Select RX or TX to display received traffic only or transmitted traffic only in the chart Time Interval Select the time periods to display in the chart Available choices are Minute Day and Month Scan Click this to update the chart according to your selected criteria 5 7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical i
321. igure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic Click Network Setting QoS Policer Setup The screen appears as shown Figure 78 Network Setting gt QoS gt Policer Setup Add new Policer Policer Setup decides the rules of the inbound traffic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Network Setting gt QoS gt Policer Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the policer is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active Name This field displays the descriptive name of this policer Regulated This field displays the name of a QoS classifier Classes Meter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer Rule These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the member QoS classes Action This shows the how the policer has the Device treat different types of traffic belonging to the policer s member QoS classes Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the policer Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 147 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS
322. il Notification Add New Email B Note E mail notification only support the e mail server using port 25 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 145 Maintenance gt Email Notification LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Email Click this button to create a new entry Mail Server This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server Address Username This field displays the user name of the sender s mail account Password This field displays the password of the sender s mail account Email Address This field displays the e mail address that you want to be in the from sender line of the e mail that the Device sends Delete Click this button to delete the selected entry ies VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 308 Chapter 36 E mail Notification 36 2 1 Email Notification Edit Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen Use this screen to configure the required information for sending e mail via a mail server Figure 177 Email Notification gt Add Email Notification Configuration Mail Server Address Authentication Username Authentication Password Account Email Address SMTP Server NAME or IP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 146 Email Notification gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail address s
323. in bytes the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped f the PBS bucket has enough tokens the Device checks the CBS bucket The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet in bytes Otherwise the packet is marked yellow VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 10 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 10 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network Section 10 2 on page 156 Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network Section 10 3 on page 159 Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the Device s trigger port settings Section 10 4 on page 161 Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server Section 10 5 on page 164 Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP VoIP ALG in the Device Section 10 6 on page 164 Use the Address Mapping screen to co
324. ines for Management of IP Address Space VMG8924 B10A User s Guide C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 229 Pop up Blocker Tools Mail and News Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 357 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 230 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Priva
325. ing Note The Device needs to restart to make the role change take effect Figure 61 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt 5th Ethernet Port State B Notes 1 State Enable the Ethernet Port is LAN ethernet 2 State Disable the Ethernet Port is WAN ethernet Cancel O Enable Disabled The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt 5th Ethernet Port LABEL State DESCRIPTION Select Enable to use the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port on the Device Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 7 10 The LAN VLAN Screen Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN VLAN to open this screen Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802 1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports Figure 62 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN VLAN Lan1 Lan2 Lan3 Lan4 B Note 1 The Lan VLAN operation only work in downstream traffic 2 If TAG Operation is Add the VLAN tag only add when downstream packet is Untag Apply Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Lan Port These represent the Device s LAN ports Tag Operation Sel
326. ing up Your Computer s IP Address Click Advanced Figure 201 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 6 Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add n TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Yo
327. ink encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 50 BA 72 5B 44 inet addr 172 23 19 129 Bcast 172 23 19 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 717 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 13 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 730412 713 2 Kb TX bytes 1570 1 5 Kb Interrupt 10 Base address 0x1000 root localhost VMG8924 B10A User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered An IP address is made
328. ion rate allowed for traffic on this connection WAN Outgoing Select Enable and enter a DSCP DiffServ Code Point value to have the Device add it in the Default Tag packets sent by this WAN interface VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MTU MTU Size Apply Enter the MTU Maximum Transfer Unit size for this traffic Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 5 2 1 2 Bridge Mode Click the Add new WAN I nterface in the Network Setting Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode The screen varies depending on the interface type you select If you select ADSL VDSL over PTM as the interface type the following screen appears Figure 24 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Bridge Mode General Active Name Type Mode VLAN Active 802 1p 802 1q QoS Rate Limit r ADSL VDSL over PTM Bridge 0 4094 kbps Aopiy cance The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 8 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Bridge Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select
329. iously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 164 IEEE 802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the Device are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Device identity The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your Device Table 165 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled M
330. iption This shows the description of this rule Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule Note You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 18 Scheduler Rule 18 2 1 Add Edit a Schedule Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule Rule Name Day Description Figure 126 Scheduler Rule Add Edit Time of Day Range C sun F mon C tue wen C tHu F FR F sat From To hh mm Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 95 Scheduler Rule Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Name Enter a name up to 31 printable English keyboard characters not including spaces for this schedule Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform this scheduler rule Time if Day Range Description Enter the time period of each day in 24 hour format during which the rule will be enforced Enter a description for this scheduler rule Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Certificates 19 1 Overview The Device can use certificates also called di
331. irst 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix IPv6 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FC00 0000 0000 0000 IPv6 Rapid Deployment Use IPv6 Rapid Deployment 6rd when the local network uses IPv6 and the ISP has an IPv4 network When the Device has an IPv4 WAN address and you set I Pv6 IPv4 Mode to I Pv4 Only you can enable 6rd to encapsulate IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets to cross the ISP s IPv4 network The Device generates a global IPv6 prefix from its Pv4 WAN address and tunnels IPv6 traffic to the ISP s Border Relay router BR in the figure to connect to the native IPv6 Internet The local network can also use IPv4 services The Device uses it s configured IPv4 WAN IP to route IPv4 traffic to the IPv4 Internet Figure 20 IPv6 Rapid Deployment LAN WAN Pv6 Pv4 IPv4 Pv6 in IPv4 ISP IPv4 S IPv6 in IPv4 IPv6 IPv C Oa IPv6 Internet IPv4 Internet VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Dual Stack Lite Use Dual Stack Lite when local network computers use IPv4 and the ISP has an IPv6 network When the Device has an IPv6 WAN address and you set I Pv6
332. is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices Your Device supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Device through the network The Device supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two SNMPv2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation Figure 173 SNMP Management Model MANAGER SNMP AGENT AGENT AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the Device An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 297 Chapter 34 SNMP managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the
333. ith IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body D claration d exposition aux radiations Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contr l Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the ex
334. itted Specify the committed rate When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is Rate less than the committed rate the device applies the conforming action to the traffic Committed Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts This must be equal to or less than the Burst Size peak burst size two rate three color or excess burst size single rate three color if it is also configured This is the maximum size of the first token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm Conforming Specify what the Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size green Action marked packets e Pass Send the packets without modification e DSCP Mark Change the DSCP mark value of the packets Enter the DSCP mark value to use Non Specify what the Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and Conforming burst size red marked packets Action Drop Discard the packets e DSCP Mark Change the DSCP mark value of the packets Enter the DSCP mark value to use The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 52 Policer Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Available Class Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier Selected Class Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the gt button to move it to the Selected Class box
335. ity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Messages This field states the reason for the log VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 267 Chapter 22 Log VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Traffic Status 23 1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN LAN interfaces and NAT 23 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics Section 23 2 on page 269 Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics Section 23 3 on page 271 Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the Device s client s Section 23 4 on page 272 23 2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status to open the WAN screen The figure in this screen shows the number of bytes received and sent on the Device Figure 158 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN Status Sent Received 2 319 376Bytes 44 801 523Bytes Refresh Interval 60 Seconds v Packets Sent Packets Received Data 519 543 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 23 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 128 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Connected This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected Interface Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this in
336. ke this action VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 167 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 9 The Sessions Screen Use this screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions a client can use Click Network Setting NAT Sessions to display the following screen Figure 94 Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions B Note MAX NAT Session Per Host 15000 Enter session number and click Apply to activate this feature Clear the session number field and click Apply to deactivate this feature Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 67 Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions LABEL DESCRIPTION WAX NAT Session Per Host Apply Use this field to set a limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client host can have If only a few clients use peer to peer applications you can raise this number to improve their performance With heavy peer to peer application use lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions Click this to save your changes on this screen Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes 10 10 Technical Reference This part contains more information regarding NAT 10 10 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the
337. l not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup In this case contact your network administrator 13 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the File Sharing screen to enable file sharing server Section 13 1 3 on page 185 Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files Section 13 3 on page 188 Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server Section 13 4 on page 189 13 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 13 USB Service 13 1 2 1 About File Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network Shares When settings are set to default each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder called a share If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition then each partition will be allocated a share You can also configure a share to be a sub folder or file on the USB device File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems The file sharing feature on
338. lapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 241 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet aanse Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS
339. le After Subnetting i a 1 5 A n 8 a E a 1 8 1 B uU I B I ql E i D i E 9 192 168 1 0 25 4 192 168 1 128 251 am um um um um um um um um PF Oe nm um um um m um In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 29 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 157 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER TVAE EIE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 0000000
340. le wireless etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the Device does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior mutu
341. le O Disable Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 63 Network Setting gt NAT gt ALG LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT ALG Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port forwarding and address mapping rules SIP ALG Enable this to make sure SIP VoIP works correctly with port forwarding and address mapping rules RTSP ALG Enable this to have the Device detect RTSP traffic and help build RTSP sessions through its NAT The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 10 7 The Address Mapping Screen Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored Click Network Setting NAT Address Mapping to display the following screen Figure 91 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping Add new rule 10 1 2 3 One to One The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 64 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping Global Start IP LABEL DESCRIPT
342. le to accept some services VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN This screen contains the following fields Table 102 Security gt IPSec VPN LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Click this button to add an item to the list Connection This displays the index number of an entry Status This displays whether the VPN policy is enabled Enable or not Disable Connection Name The name of the VPN policy Remote Gateway This is the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA Local Addresses This displays the IP address es on the LAN behind your Device Remote This displays the IP address es on the LAN behind the remote IPSec s router Addresses Delete Click the Edit icon to modify the VPN policy Click the Delete icon to delete the VPN policy 20 3 The IPSec VPN Add Edit Screen Use these settings to add or edit VPN policies Click the Add New Connection button in the Security VPN screen to open this screen as shown next 220 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Figure 136 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit lActive IPSec Connection Name Remote IPSec Gateway Address IP or Domain Name Tunnel access from local IP addresses IP Address for VPN IP Subnetmask Tunnel access from remote IP addresses IP Address for VPN IP Subnetmask Protocol Key Exchange Method Authentication Method Pre Shared Key Local ID Type Local ID Con
343. ll Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution etwork and Internet onnect to the Internet Clock Language and Region fale Change keyboards or other input a methods Change display language View network status and tasks Set up file sharing 3 Click Network and Sharing Center Figure 206 Windows Vista Network And Internet CION P gt Control Panel Network and Internet s Search p File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home 3 Network and Sharing Center V work sta n es onnect to a network View network computers and devices Add a device to the network Set up file sharing System and Maintenance Security Network and Internet 5 Internet Options Connect to the Internet Changeyourhomepage Manage browser add ons Hardware and Sound Programs Delete browsing history and cookies VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections Figure 207 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center P Network and Internet p Network and Sharing Center File Edit View Tools Help Ms Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices Connect to a network Set up a connection or network Manage network connections BB 3 TWPC99111 Diagnose and repair This computer a Not connected View full map W x Internet 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties
344. logs sending mail Active Log and Alert System Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record Send Select log categories for which you want the Device to send E mail alerts immediately immediate alert Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 37 2 1 Example E mail Log An End of Log message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent The following is an example of a log sent by e mail You may edit the subject title The date format here is Day Month Year The date format here is Month Day Year The time format is Hour Minute Second VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 37 Logs Setting End of Log message shows that a complete log has been sent Figure 179 E mail Log Example Subject Firewall Alert From Date Fri 07 Apr 2000 10 05 42 From user zyxel com To user zyxel com l Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 1 To 192 168 1 255 default policy forward 09 54 03 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 00 2 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 131 To 192 168 1 255 default policy forward 09 54 17 UDP Src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 00 3 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 6 To 10 10 10 10 match forward 09 54 19 UDP src port 03516 dest port 00053 1 01 CTORUM STRE ascsteceee tette pedes A TOOLATE SNiP
345. lue VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Table 113 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Server Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service Address provider You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy redirect or register server SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value REGISTER Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters REGISTER Server Port Enter the SIP register server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field SIP Service Enter the SIP service domain name In the full SIP URI this is the part after the 9 symbol Domain You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters RFC Support Support Select this option to have the Device use DNS procedures to resolve the SIP domain and Locating SIP find the SIP server s IP address port number and supported transport protocol s Server RFC32
346. ly To Phone Select a phone port on which you want to make or receive phone calls for this SIP account If you map a phone port to more than one SIP account there is no way to distinguish between the SIP accounts when you receive phone calls The Device uses the most recently registered SIP account first when you make an outgoing call If a phone port is not mapped to a SIP account you cannot receive or make any calls on the phone connected to this phone port more less Click more to display and edit more information for the SIP account Click less to display and configure the basic SIP account settings URI Type Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the Device sends the SIP number SIP include the SIP service domain name TEL do not include the SIP service domain name Voice Features Primary Compression Type Secondary Compression Type Third Compression Type Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want the Device to use G 711 provides high voice quality but requires more bandwidth 64 kbps G 711 is the default codec used by phone companies and digital handsets e G 711a is typically used in Europe e G 711u is typically used in North America and Japan G 726 24 operates at 24 kbps G 726 32 operates at 32 kbps G 722 is a 7 KHz wideband voice codec that operates at 48 56 and 64 kbps By using a sample rate of 16 kHz G 722 can provide higher fidelity and b
347. m to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold 370 A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see prev
348. maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages In IPv6 the Device configures a link local address automatically and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique If there is an address to be resolved or verified the Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message When the Device receives a neighbor advertisement in response it stores the neighbor s link layer address in the neighbor cache When the Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message it adds the router s information to the neighbor cache prefix list and destination cache The Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router When the Device needs to send a packet it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop If there is no matching entry in the destination cache the Device uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on link and can be reached directly without passing through a router If the address is unlink the address is considered as the next hop Otherwise the Device determines the next hop from the default router list or routing table Once the next hop IP address is known the Device looks into the neighbor cache to get the link layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable If the Device cannot find an entry in the ne
349. mation will be dynamically assigned to you from your ISP Iv Dont automatically show this Quick Start after login Back Close 3 Turn the wireless LAN on or off If you keep it on record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the Device Click Save Figure 14 Internet Connection Quick Start IX Wireless Setting Step 3 of3 The following settings are the current wireless settings which your wireless client devices need in order to get connected to this device Wireless Service G Enable ODisable Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL4049FD Security WPA2 PSK Password B779D0007234 L1Do not automatically show this Quick Start after login 4 Your Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet VMG8924 B10A User s Guide PART Il once 4 1 Overview After you log into the Web Configurator the Network Map screen appears This shows the network connection status of the Device and clients connected to it You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the Device system resources and interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN 4 2 The Network Map Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients A warning message appears if there is a connection problem Figure 15 Network Map Icon View Mode ZyXEL VMG8924 B10A Pg Enolish v MES Mm Network Map Viewing mode L Internet
350. membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between GMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group At start up the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Device periodically updates this information DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an informa
351. meone party A press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call to party B 3 When party B answers the second call press the flash key to create a three way conversation 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection 5 f you want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections with party A on line and party B on hold press the flash key 6 If you want to go back to the three way conversation press the flash key again 7 f you want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections again press the flash key This time the party B is on line and party A is on hold 21 10 2 4 Phone Functions Summary The following table shows the key combinations you can enter on your phone s keypad to use certain features Table 124 Phone Functions Summary ACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION O8 Call transfer Transfer a call to another phone See Section 21 10 2 2 on page 259 Europe type and Section 21 10 2 3 on page 261 USA type 66 Call return Place a call to the last person who called you O5 Enable Do Not Disturb Use these to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you or 95 Disable Do Not Disturb t turn Pals TUR HORROR 41 Enable Call Waiting Use these to allow you to put a call on hold when you are answering 41 Disable Call Waiting another or to turn this
352. mplete select Start gt All Programs gt Dibbler DHCPv6 gt Client Install as service Select Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 4 Double click Dibbler a DHCPv6 client i Services ile by Services Local Action View Help SAB Am Services Local Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As Provides la Started Automatic Local System Started Automatic ocal Start the service i 8 Automatic Local Systei Automatic Local System Sy Distributed Transaction Coordinator Coordinate Manual Network S Description SY DNS Client Resolves a Started Automatic Network S Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 Sy Error Reporting Service Allows erro Started Automatic Local System This is DHCPv6 ci Sy Event Log Enables ev Started Automatic Local System iig cient version Sy Extensible Authentication Protocol Provides wi Manual Local System 0 7 2 Sa Fast User Switching Compatibility Provides m Manual Local System Ss FLEXnet Licensing Service This servic Manual Local System sia i z x j a IN Extended 5 Click Start and then OK Dibbler a DHCP v6 client Properties Local Computer General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DHCPv amp Client Display name Dibbler a DHCPv amp client Description Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 This is DHCPv6 cl
353. n delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs 150 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In
354. n traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves these steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion allowing time sensitive applications to flow more smoothly Time sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency delay and a low level of jitter variations in delay such as Voice over IP VoIP or Internet gaming and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers 9 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth Section 9 3 on page 139 The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment Section 9 4 on page 140 The Class Setup screen lets you add edit or delete QoS classifiers Section 9 5 on page 142 The Policer Setup screen lets you add edit or delete QoS policers Section 9 5 on page 142 9 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All p
355. nE SE AEE Fic dar Rav ASS KR a MR E AEAEE 61 Sa MO GOS e SCT e E 62 B5 EOE SOIA SENE i A E EPUM GR php Ebor Rae Uta lube d o a 63 5 8 nhe WAN Stag SON BM sanee enean tud ide Duistedeut ouv pae hes age opcre ERE HOM Dens DR RU TE eU oSUE 63 i Technical Bele Ii oicusceuuctesm oy a r auc dente Fes ea deme EEEn AME EEA UN MD PARU EE 64 Chapter 6 Pls N E M 9 71 FUR DP tes egg eee Sch S TL TR I DHT 71 cwm Wher You Can Dom Mis Chante t 71 B L2 What You Need to KNOW acres ribs irinna ran E Ebr a LE RN T 72 6 2 The caneral SO BOE ecis Era 72 Cel No SECUN e 75 Dae ESI WEF ENSIS onneaan I stad VoU ements Eo dau E ance ed REN aD 75 Boca More Secure PVP Le FOK cenana 78 Eod WPATO PU OT a agant juo at agant PRO an EY Ru a a dead 79 CAE UW i FR ae C NRI EET T A A E 80 SRM CE Ate cT 82 Bd MAG Athen 4rd is ci toi epe teneas Horde lane E AH ER EDD MEAS EUM NE etu E MEE 84 B5 nhe NFS dll quucintobso seu be Pe dae beta den E as ebat bali ethos ten OR tie eu edes toni dicu onn 85 Co TS SI PW MEO E TERR 86 CBAR RT HER IR TETTE TR RI N 87 60 d MDO SUBIT ee re peer er te Ree eRe eT Cen a idR NEM pene rrr torres Mer a dabei ede Ms 88 B 3 Th CAS ooroo accensi ie qo adven s ane d dran RR etn ta diei arid Ele Rea 89 6 9 The Channel Status Screen dius aaa sag Raya an qu AUn aaa RAPERE nr Aaaa R nana aU RA Rasa a VERA auda 91 0 10 Tee e PTS Re cirio S 91 6 10 1 Wireless Network OVEIVIBW uuu
356. nP and refresh My Network Places Local Network 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Device s LAN port or from your computer 2 Re connect the Ethernet cable The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen Restart your computer cannot open special applications such as white board file transfer and video when use the MSN messenger Q1 Wait more than three minutes 2 Restart the applications VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Device s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window Figure 194 Windows 95 98
357. nance Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears in this screen as shown next Figure 184 Maintenance gt Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Restore Configuration File Path Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Resetto clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset by server Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up save the Device s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your Device is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the Device s current configuration to your computer VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 39 Configuration Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Device Table 149 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the file you want t
358. nces than 2 4 GHz networks and can offer higher speeds However 5 GHz signals do not penetrate solid objects like walls as well as 2 4 GHz signals can do It is easy to get signal attenuation if there are many walls between the Device and a client 5 GHz is used by IEEE 802 11a n ac wireless clients VMG8924 B10A User s Guide T3 Chapter 6 Wireless 74 Table 15 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Channel Set the channel depending on your particular region Select a channel or use Auto to have the Device automatically determine a channel to use If you are having problems with wireless interference changing the channel may help Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible The channel number which the Device is currently using then displays next to this field The available channels vary depending on the bandwidth you select in the Bandwidth field more less Click more to show more information Click less to hide them Bandwidth Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz 40MHz or 80MHz available for 5 GHz networks only A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps and a 80MHz channel uses only one channel and offers speeds of up to 433 Mbps A wider band en
359. nd Ethernet WAN ports to use the 3G dongle as your primary WAN connection The Device automatically uses a wired WAN connection when available Note This Device supports connecting one 3G dongle at a time Figure 26 Internet Access Application 3G WAN Use this screen to configure your 3G settings Click Network Setting Broadband 3G Backup VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Note The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use the signal strength to the service provider s base station and so on Figure 27 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup General 36 Backup Trigger by ETHER WAN Down Ping Check Check Cycle Consecutive PING Fail Ping Default Gateway Ping the Host Bj note 3G Connection Settings Card description Username Password PIN Dial string APN Connection IP Address 19 static ONS rver Secondary DNS server ClEnable Email Notification Mail Server 3G backup Send Email Title Send Notification to Email B Note Primary WAN is not in service when ping failed after consecutive times 9 Obtain an IP Address Automatically Use the following static IP address gt Obtain DNS info dynamically Budget Setup Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Enable Buc Enable Disable trigger 3G backup when physical link of primary WAN is dow Time Budget hours per month Enable Disable Mbytes per month Ev
360. nd only or More Secure WPA 2 PSK WPA 2 to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device When you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See the following sections for more details about this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 2 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 34 Wireless gt General No Security Security Level No Security v v v 7e6 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Wireless gt General No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or authentication 6 2 2 Basic WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points AP to keep network communications private Both the wireless stations and the acc
361. nfigure the Device s address mapping settings Section 10 7 on page 165 Use the Sessions screen to configure the Device s maximum number of NAT sessions Section 10 7 on page 165 10 1 2 What You Need To Know Inside Outside Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global Local Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 155 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT NAT In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as
362. nformation about the Device features described in this chapter Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The Device can work in bridge mode or routing mode When the Device is in routing mode it supports the following methods IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet IPoE is an alternative to PPPoE IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network without using PPP encapsulation They are routed between the Ethernet interface e VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells PPP over ATM PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digital access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cab
363. ng or receiving data to from the WAN at 10 100 Mbps Off There is no Ethernet connection on the WAN I Ed Green On The Device has a successful 1000 Mbps Ethernet connection with a EAN device on the Local Area Network LAN Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 1000 Mbps Off The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN alll Green On The 2 4 GHz wireless network is activated Wiki 2 4G Blinking The Device is communicating with 2 4 GHz wireless clients Orange Blinking The Device is setting up a WPS connection with a 2 4 GHz wireless client Off The 2 4 GHz wireless network is not activated lll Green On The 5 GHz wireless network is activated Wiki 5G Blinking The Device is communicating with 5 GHz wireless clients Orange Blinking The Device is setting up a WPS connection with a 5 GHz wireless client Off The 5 GHz wireless network is not activated C C Green On A SIP account is registered for the phone port Phonel Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook Phone2 or there is an incoming call Orange On A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account Off The phone port does not have a SIP account registered er Green On The Device recognizes a USB connection th
364. ng up Your Computer s IP Address f you have a static IP address select Specify an I P address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 195 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address TCP IP Properties E E xi gres ES Es ER i 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab f you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS f you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in Figure 196 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration TCP IP Properties WE Host Doma UNS Sever search Wraer Domain Sufiy Search Order VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Click the Gateway tab f you do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways f you have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your Device and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 In the Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP The following
365. nnections with different APNs may provide different services such as Internet access or MMS Multi Media Messaging Service and charge method You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters Spaces are allowed Connection Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out Select on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Max Idle This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically Timeout disconnects from the ISP Obtain an IP Select this option if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address Address Automatically Use the Select this option if the ISP assigned a fixed IP address following static IP address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP address Obtain DNS Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically info dynamically Use the Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually Primary Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server Secondary Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server Enable Email Select this to enable the e mail notification function The Device will e mail you a Notification notification when the 3G connection is up Mail Server Select a mail server for the e mail address specified below
366. ns make sure that a safety level is selected VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window Figure 235 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Q Disable 9 Enable ER Font download Disable 9 Enable y Q Prompt 5 Microsoft vM Er Java permissions Q custom 2 Disable Jav 9 High safety Q Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium z Reset cms JAVA Sun 1 2 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Advanced tab Make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 236 Java Sun 3px General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings v Use HTTP 1 1 af Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections 3 Microsoft v O Java console enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing F b Restore Defaults Ap
367. number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 155 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 224 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 24 3 bits 23 2 6 8 Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide E Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 156 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation sues RARER ENERO egeo 255 255
368. number indicates the number after the colon replaces the number before the colon in an angle bracket lt gt For example lt 1212 gt xxxxxxx means the Device automatically prefixes the translated number 1212 to the number you dialed before making the call This can be used for local calls in the US lt 9 gt Xxx Xxxxxxx means the Device automatically removes the specified prefix 9 from the number you dialed before making the call This is always used for making outside calls from an office xx lt 123 456 gt xxxx means the Device automatically translates 123 to 456 in the number you dialed before making the call Calls with a number followed by the exclamation mark will be dropped Calls with a number followed by the termination character 9 will be made immediately Any digit 0 9 after the 9 character will be ignored In this example dial plan 0 49 11 1 2 9 xx xxxxxxx 1 947 xxxxxxx you can dial 0 to call the local operator call 411 or 911 or make a long distance call with an area code starting from 2 to 9 in the US The calls with the area code 947 will be dropped VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice 21 5 The Phone Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the Device is in To access this screen click Vol P Phone Figure 146 VoIP gt Phone Region Settings USA NORTHAMERICA v Call Service Mode Europe Ty
369. o identify the remote IPSec router by an e mail address Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name Select ASN1DN to identify the remote IPSec router by the subject field in a certificate This is used only with certificate based authentication Remote ID Content The configuration of the remote content depends on the remote ID type For I P type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection If you configure this field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank the Device will use the address in the Remote IPSec Gateway Address field refer to the Remote IPSec Gateway Address field description For DNS or E mail type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 or use the DNS or E mail D type in the following situations When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers When you want the Device to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses Advanced IKE Settings Click more to display advanced settings Click less to display basic settings only NAT Traversal Select Enable if you want to set up a VPN tunnel when there are NA
370. o upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress After the Device configuration has been restored successfully the login screen appears Login again to restart the Device The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 185 Network Temporarily Disconnected a Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix A on page 327 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 186 Configuration Upload Error Configuration uploading failed The selected file contains an illegal Configuration setting 312 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 39 Configuration Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the Device to its factory defaults The following warning screen appears Figure 187 Reset Warning Message Confirm x
371. odify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request Click the Remove button to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 19 Certificates 19 4 1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate Figure 132 Trusted CA View Name Type Subject Certificate MIIESTCCA1GgAwIBAglOGKaoaDflmLIDGHjtntb3 1jANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQUFADA MRMwEQYKCZImiZPyLGQBGRYDY29tMRUWEWYKCZImiZPyLGQBGRYFWnlYRUWxED AO BgNVBAMTB1pSWEVMQOEwHhcNMDcwMjA1MDMwMTIOWhcNMTCwMjA1TMDMwOTQS WIA MRMWEQYKCZImiZPyLGQBGRYDY29tMRUWEwYKCZImiZPyLGQBGRYFWnlYRUwxED AO BoNVBAMTB1p5WEVMQ0EwggEiIMA0GCSqGSib3D QEBAQUAA4IBDWAwggEKAoIBAQ E DS z certnew cer ca DC com DC ZyxXELICN ZyXELCA BEGIN CERTIFICATE Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 100 Trusted CA View LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Subject This field displays information that i
372. oe Re edd ad zn Bar FERME PaL EE Faa E ELE RE EER CADRE ER LER ERR FAS REESE ERE IO LER ER 219 CRM E I ERE a E 219 20 2 The IPS6e VPN General Sieen oie ede reed ir IR ee REEF ele Id Eric REDEEM 219 20 3 The P See VPN Add Edil SORS 3 3 terc iia tt placa e Puedo a beber deat Cede t Ex TER bee O vd aset ere ex os etae Dueh 220 20A The IPSec VPN Monitor DICFOBD cosoeeeccl e osse beoe este eoa cp Reb meae ES Lec na EE obe abd reb oq apte obe dona aiaa 226 20 5 Technical PVCU S ICO cse cc ond koe ea es aa dd e Con eh aan ea dria Da edet co Idee us Parit unn pd 226 ih VS PO RDS IN ioni uoisidio dade aiie 226 WEL ENCO OO MP E TEILT UI LU IL 227 20 33 IKE Phases roneo A D eder rdg M ct E e A A a Ri 228 E Mesum o e 229 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Table of Contents z SSIPSEC BE NAT asamini m irai atn dcn d eaa taa oce d Ert a apt PC danda 230 gU 5D VPN NAT and NAT Traversal usada cierre idirp Xena nicer alex dca o dob bz aada SUI ka a r gc in naa 230 205 7D Tope and C OMENI usi esce iecore cdi o It Mae biete a ar eens 231 cg ee oa aid nae acid ad ben ea Rho aa n bbb b atram ives anata 232 20 5 9 D ttesHelliriad DH Kay Groups vi success proint c desi pe PuTipE rubr Ya aebE tert iugi A mumsnet 232 Chapter 21 VOICE m aa 233 CANESC UI PL UU T UL TT 233 21 1 3 What You Can De in is Chapter 2sassuscucutiapb tanc tibd baec p
373. of ports that causes or triggers the Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Trigger End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP UDP or TCP UDP Open Start Port The open port is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The Device forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP UDP or TCP UDP OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 5 The DMZ Screen In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup Screen Figure 89 Network Setting gt NAT gt DMZ B Note Default Server Address Enter IP address and click
374. omain Name System See DNS DoS 196 DS field 151 258 DS dee differentiated services DSCP 150 258 dynamic DNS 173 wildcard 174 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 374 DYNDNS wildcard 174 E EAP Authentication 373 ECHO 171 echo cancellation 256 e mail log example 306 Encapsulation 64 MER 64 PPP over Ethernet 65 encapsulation 44 227 RFC 1483 65 encryption 95 375 ESP 227 ESS 368 Europe type call service mode 259 Extended Service Set IDentification 74 83 Extended Service Set See ESS 368 F FCC interference statement 393 file sharing 19 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Index filters MAC address 84 94 Finger 171 firewalls 195 add protocols 197 configuration 197 DDoS 196 DoS 196 LAND attack 196 Ping of Death 196 SYN attack 196 firmware 309 version 39 flash key 259 flashing 259 forwarding ports 156 fragmentation threshold 89 93 370 FTP 156 171 G G 168 256 General wireless LAN screen 72 Guide Quick Start 2 H hidden node 369 HTTP 171 IANA 356 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA IBSS 367 IC Industry Canada statement 394 ID type and content 231 IEEE 802 11g 371 IEEE 802 1Q 68 IGA 169 IGMP 68 multicast group list 279 version 68 IKE phases 228 ILA 169 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 367 initialization vector IV 375 Inside Global Address see IGA inside header 228 Inside Local Address see ILA inter
375. ome up with effective security keys passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words For example if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point which you know was made in 1971 you could use 7O0dodchal71vanpoi as your security key The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 6 10 3 1 SSID Normally the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 6 10 3 2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network see the device s User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or n
376. onnection when the Device receives packets destined for the Internet Manual select this if you want to manually trigger the connection up Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server This field is not configurable if you select Auto Connect in the PPP Triger Type field PPPoE Service Name Enter the name of your PPPoE service here PPPoE Passthrough This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation In addition to the Device s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Device Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP IP Address This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or IPv6 IPv4 DualStack in the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed Address the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you Automatically have a dynamic IP address DHCP This field displays
377. onnections and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier PTI in the cell header Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types segment F4 flows VCI 23 end to end F4 flows VCI 4 segment F5 flows PTI 2100 e end to end F5 flows PTI 2101 OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL devices Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC segment End to end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection where an ATM link is terminated Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device End to end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end to end PVC Note The DSLAM to which the Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and or F5 to use this test VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 40 Diagnostic Note This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer 2 interface Figure 193 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt OAM Ping C info VPIVCI 0 33 F4 segment F4 end end F5 segment F5 end end The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 152 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt OAM Ping LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test F4 end
378. ot allowed to use the wireless network If a device is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct information SSID channel and security If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct information 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A BB C D E and F 94 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 6 10 3 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it However every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server This is a server used in businesses more than in homes If you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information
379. otocol Key Exchange Method Select the key exchange method Auto I KE Select this to use automatic IKE key management VPN connection policy Manual Select this option to configure a VPN connection policy that uses a manual key instead of IKE key management This may be useful if you have problems with IKE key management Note Only use manual key as a temporary solution because it is not as secure as a regular IPSec SA Authentication Method Select Pre Shared Key to use a pre shared key for authentication and type in your pre shared key A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection Select Certificate X 509 to use a certificate for authentication Pre Shared Key Type your pre shared key in this field A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation Type from 8 to 31 case sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal 0 9 A F characters You must precede a hexadecimal key with a Ox zero x which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key For example in 0x0123456789ABCDEF Ox denotes that the key is hexadecimal and 0123456789ABCDEF is the key itself Local ID Type Select IP to identify the Device by its IP address Select E mail to i
380. ount information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled 3 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL connection Network Setting gt I nterface Group 4 Ifyou set up a WAN connection using bridging service make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time You can only use one type of DSL connection either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the Device but my Internet connection is not available anymore 1 Your session with the Device may have expired Try logging into the Device again VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 20 3 Turn the Device off and on 4 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP 41 4 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection How can solve this problem The following factors may cause interference Obstacles walls ceilings furniture and so on Building Materials metal doors aluminum studs Electrical devices microwaves monitors
381. ovider Add new provider 1 ServiceProvider 1 changeme changeme changeme 2 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Each field is described in the following table Table 112 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new provider This is the index number of the entry SIP Service This shows the name of the SIP service provider Provider Name SIP Server This shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP server Address REGISTER Server This shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server Address SIP Service This shows the SIP service domain name Domain Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP service provider Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP service provider from the Device 21 4 1 The SIP Service Provider Add Edit Screen Use this screen to configure a SIP service provider on the Device Click the Add new provider button or an Edit icon in the VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider to open the following screen 240 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Note Click more to see all the fields in the screen You don t necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account Click less to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature Figure 145 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit SIP Service Provider Selection
382. owed in Internet Explorer 2 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide Launch your web browser If the Device does not automatically re direct you to the login screen go to http 192 168 1 1 A password screen displays To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login If advanced account security is enabled see Section 30 2 on page 287 the number of dots that appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password field from knowing the length of your password If you have changed the password enter your password and click Login Figure 7 Password Screen ZyXEL Welcome Welcome to VMG8924 B10A configuration interface Please enter username and password to login Username Passwort VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 25 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 4 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password It is strongly recommended you change the default password Enter a new password retype it to confirm and click Apply alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now Figure8 Change Password Screen Change password Itis highly recommended to setup a new password instead of using the default one for security concerns The pas
383. ows a global address 2001 b021 2d 1000 obtained from a DHCP server C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IPv6 Address 2 20012 b021 2d 1000 Link local IPv6 Address fe80 25d8 dcab c80a 5189 11 IPv4 Address e e s w 172 16 100 61 Subnet Mask s 4 eoe oce 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway e80 213 49f feaa 7125 11 172 16 100 254 388 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFI NED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix F Services Table 171 Examples of Services
384. pe B Note Caution When Region Settings is changed you need to reboot device to take settings effect Each field is described in the following table Table 114 VoIP gt Phone LABEL DESCRIPTION Region Settings Select the place in which the Device is located Call Service Mode Select the mode for supplementary phone services call hold call waiting call transfer and three way conference calls that your VoIP service provider supports Europe Type use supplementary phone services in European mode USA Type use supplementary phone services American mode You might have to subscribe to these services to use them Contact your VoIP service provider Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 21 6 The Call Rule Screen Use this screen to add edit or remove speed dial numbers for outgoing calls Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently used Vol P phone numbers You also have to create speed dial entries if you want to call SIP numbers that contain letters Once you have configured a speed dial VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 247 Chapter 21 Voice rule you can use a shortcut the speed dial number 01 for example on your phone s keypad to call the phone number Figure 147 VoIP gt Call Rule Clear all speed dials Cancel Each field is des
385. pecified Address in the Account Email Address field If this field is left blank reports logs or notifications will not be sent via e mail Authentication Username Enter the user name up to 32 characters This is usually the user name of a mail account you specified in the Account Email Address field Authentication Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Account Email Enter the e mail address that you want to be in the from sender line of the e mail Address notification that the Device sends If you activate SSL TLS authentication the e mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well Apply Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen Cancel Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 37 Logs Setting 37 1 Overview You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the Device records in the Logs Setting screen 37 2 The Log Settings Screen To change your Device s log settings click Maintenance gt Logs Setting The screen appears as shown Figure 178 Maintenance gt Logs Setting Syslog Setting Syslog Logging Oknable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Mode Syslog Server Server NAME or IPv4 IPv6 Address UDP Port Server Port E mail Log Settings Mail Server M System Log Mail Subject Security
386. pecified below If you do not select a mail server e mail notifications cannot be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance gt Email Notification screen Email Title Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e mail notifications that the Device sends Send Notifications are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank notifications cannot be sent via e mail Security Level Security Mode Select Basic WEP 802 1X or More Secure WPA 2 PSK WPA 2 to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See Section 6 2 1 on page 75 for more details about this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 4 MAC Authentication This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices Allow or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at
387. pectin apcE URS E ud 191 143 The Auto Switeh Olf STOET sass oi baexuek niae brecexa aa adv eu FLT MESE UD Feu EUR vsu cu EE 192 14 3 1 The Auto Switch Off Add Edit Green is iiiccacsssssvecadasnsnadeaannteradanantaseadicanntvndacaantnsedacdunteodaciants 193 143 2 The Add Edit Rule SB sian vir ratu gin gab a P p AD p OR pr b a 193 Chapter 15 3 lf r X X 195 DONEC C UI RES E Umm 195 1o11 What You Cai Do inthis Chaplet Hec aeaa i EEEa 195 15 12 What rou EE To KION TER 196 T1542 ho FU oO ie DI a UR TP TRLAB RETO MEI MPO VRLUM dadenals pet bvR DON DIM K OE DPF DUM NEA 197 15 5 The Fiolocol SCREEN gous ve n VERE Ob VERCOR VERIS GPVER GA lass TERR YEN RET REA ERR KE RRER QV PP VIENNA 187 peu ime i e p n MR T LI TL LT 198 ToS The oce Corel SOIBBE saicictescuscereitt prie pdiqus PRAE AQ MEER X RR ETED ORARE SEA QUEE AMINO M RRU ER DRM RUE 199 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 9 Table of Contents 154 1 eer AL PAUL 1er b eei EE erdt ir Fo eai ao cte Pea Mes rc ecelanet Libo ei ta sgem am 200 19 The ES IM TER 202 Chapter 16 USENET TRE I TI DITE IT TI reer rer rt erty IE I TIT I 203 OMEN S0 Aem 203 16 2 The MAG Filler Screen 1 aces etn in Ran taam tenen kan tanda nea k mea An nER paa aai AR EGER MARRE uaa RUE ARA 203 Chapter 17 Parens CONIFOL ci aec EE EE HR EE EE NL EE EIE ERU BR v teenie ses riis 205 EENIEWI DU TT T Te em 205 17 2 hs Parental Gomo
388. plication here Address Application Select the category of the application from the drop down list box Category Application Select a service from the drop down list box and the Device automatically configures the Forwarded protocol start end and map port number that define the service View Rule Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application Fowarded OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 4 The Port Triggering Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When
389. ply Java ee d Use Java 2141 0T for cppeb eques esi gt 2 v1 4 1 07 for d Use Java 2141 0T for enol eques esi gt requires restart Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary You can enable J ava Javascripts and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 237 Mozilla Firefox Tools gt Options m Web Search Ctrl k Downloads Ctr 3 Add ons Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus CtrH Shift A Page Info FireFTP Clear Private Data Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options Session Manager gv 9ptions 7 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen V Me Main Tabs Feeds Privacy Figure 238 Mozilla Firefox Content Security Sa amp Security Ix pg Advanced w Block pop up windows IV Load images automatically v Enable JavaScript IV Enable Java Exceptions Exceptions Advanced r Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman Size bs 16 Advanced OH Colors r File Types Configure how FireFox handles certain types of Files Manage Cancel Help VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix
390. pped Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets Committed Burst Size CBS and Peak Burst Size PBS Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 153 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM A packet arrives If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet
391. r You can configure the Device as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the Device provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured IP Pool Setup The Device is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers 7 12 3 DNS Server Addresses DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP IP Control Protocol after the connection is up If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers chances are the
392. r 1 IPv6 DNS Server 2 VLAN Active 802 1p 802 1q QoS Rate Limit WAN Outgoing Default Tag DSCP MTU MTU Size O Automatic Static None Dynamic Static 0 4094 kbps OEnable Disable 0 63 1492 MTU 68 1492 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings Name Specify a descriptive name for this connection Type Select whether it is an ADSL VDSL over PTM ADSL over ATM connection or Ethernet VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field The choices depend on the connection type you selected If your connection type is ADSL VDSL over PTM the choices are PPPoE and I PoE If your connection type is ADSL over ATM the choices are PPPoE PPPOA I PoE and IPoA IPv6 IPv4 Mode Select I Pv4 Only if you want the Device to r
393. r 6 Wireless 6 1 2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication In the same way that walkie talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves wireless networking devices exchange information with one another A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers Like walkie talkies most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use However wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption Finding Out More See Section 6 10 on page 91 for advanced technical information on wireless networks 6 2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Note If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Device s SSID channel or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Device s new settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Setting gt Wireless to open the General screen Figure 33 Network Setting gt Wireless gt
394. rapid deployment fields display when you set the IPv6 I Pv4 Mode field to IPv4 Only See IPv6 Rapid Deployment on page 46 for more information Enable DS Lite This is available only when you select I Pv6 Only in the I Pv6 IPv4 Mode field Select Enable to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISP s IPv6 network DS Lite Relay Specify the transition router s IPv6 address Server IP Enable 6RD This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only in the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field Select Enable to tunnel IPv6 traffic from the local network through the ISP s IPv4 network 6RD Type Select Static if you have the IPv4 address of the relay server otherwise select DHCP to have the Device detect it automatically through DHCP IPv4 Mask Enter the subnet mask number 1 32 for the IPv4 network Length 6RD Border When you set the 6RD Type to Static specify the relay server s IPv4 address in this field Relay Server IP 6RD IPv6 Prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix for tunneling Pv6 traffic to the ISP s border relay router and connecting to the native IPv6 Internet IPv6 Address This is available only when you select I Pv6 IPv4 DualStack or I Pv6 Only in the IPv6 I Pv4 Mode field VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv6 Address Select Automatic if you want to have t
395. re than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP s DHCP server directly If you select Bridge you cannot use routing functions such as QoS Firewall DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port s ATM PVC Configu ration These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you DSL Link Type This field is not editable The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field EoA Ethernet over ATM uses an Ethernet header in the packet so that you can have multiple services connections over one PVC You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services EoA supports ENET ENCAP IPoE PPPoE and RFC1483 2684 bridging encapsulation methods PPPoA PPP over ATM allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC I PoA IP over ATM allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC Encapsulation Mode Service Category Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices are LLC SNAP BRI DGI NG In LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the S
396. release your IP address to 0 0 0 0 If you want to renew your IP address click Renew IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN Encapsulation This field displays the current encapsulation method LAN Information IPv4 Address This is the current IPv4 IP address of the Device in the LAN IPv4 Subnet This is the current subnet mask in the LAN Mask DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN Relay The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients None The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Media Access Control Address of your Device WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Media Access Control Address of your Device Status This displays whether WLAN is activated SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN Channel This is the channel number used by the Device now Security This displays the type of security mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN 802 11 Mode This displays the type of 802 11 mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN WPS This displays whether WPS is activated
397. reless LAN interface DSL WAN This field shows whether this schedule applies to the DSL WAN interface Eth WAN This field shows whether this schedule applies to the Ethernet WAN interface LAN1 LAN4 This field shows whether this schedule applies to the corresponding LAN interface LED This field shows whether this schedule applies to the LEDs Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 192 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 14 Power Management 14 3 1 The Auto Switch Off Add Edit Screen Use this screen to manage the auto switch off schedules To access this screen click the Add or modify rules link in the Network Setting Power Management Auto Switch Off screen Figure 113 Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules bedtime BOGOR X T 2 NoWireless paagdg A 2n D The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 83 Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this link to create a rule This is the index number of a rule Rule Name This field shows the name of the rule Day This field shows the week days of the schedule in green Time This field shows the time period of the schedule Description This fiel
398. reless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption The other types of encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your Device you can also select an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some of the devices support WPA and some VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the Device Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every device in the wireless network must have the same key 6 10 4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks their signals are subject to limitations of distance interference and absorption Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal Interference may come from other radio transmissions such as military or air traffic control communications or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves Problems with absorption occur when physical objects such as thick walls are between the two radios muffling the signal BSS A Basic Service Set BS
399. resh to stop Interval refreshing 3G Status This field displays the status of the 3G Internet connection This field can display GSM Global System for Mobile Communications 2G GPRS General Packet Radio Service 2 5G EDGE Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution 2 75G WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access 3G HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access 3 5G HSUPA High Speed Uplink Packet Access 3 75G HSPA HSDPA HSUPA 3 75G Service This field displays the name of the service provider Provider VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 29 3G Statistics Table 136 System Monitor gt 3G Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Signal Strength This field displays the strength of the signal in dBm Connection This field displays the time the connection has been up Uptime 3G Card This field displays the manufacturer of the 3G card Manufacturer 3G Card Model This field displays the model name of the 3G card 3G Card F W This field displays the firmware version of the 3G card Version SIM Card IMSI The International Mobile Subscriber Identity or IMSI is a unique identification number associated with all cellular networks This number is provisioned in the SIM card 286 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide User Account 30 1 Overview In the Users Account screen you can change the password of the admin user account that you used to log in the Device 30 2 The User
400. ritten as 2001 db8 1a25b 15 0 0 1a2 0 Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 or 2001 db8 0 0 1a2 15 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix Link local Address A link local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network the LAN It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4 You can have the same link local address on multiple interfaces on a device A link local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80 10 The link local unicast address format is as follows Table 168 Link local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4 A global unicast address sta
401. rompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Ea VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Linux This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9 0 Procedure screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Using the K Desktop Environment KDE Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE 1 Click the Red Hat button located on the bottom left corner select System Setting and click Network Figure 217 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices Network Configuration File Profile Help S9 5g Xx New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate Devices Hardware DNs Hosts Ed You may configure network devices associated with E d physical hardware here Multiple logical devices can be j associated with a single piece of hardware Profile Status Device Nickname Type X Inactive ethO etho Ethernet VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Double click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown Figure 218 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General W Ethernet Device mx
402. roperties window 10 Close the Network Connections window Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT 11 Turn on your Device and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6 0 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click the Start icon Control Panel Figure 204 Windows Vista Start Menu Dr eye 7 0 Professional Connect To g Media Player Classic Control Panel Default Pro tomize the appearance and functionality of your computer add or remove programs and set up network connections and user accounts gt AllPrograms Help and Support e o 728 NN Nec 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network and Internet Figure 205 Windows Vista Control Panel GOo gt Control Panel File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home z 1 System and Maintenance a User Accounts Classic View Get started with Windows Change account type Back up your computer Security Appearance and Check for updates w Personalization Allow a program through Windows Change desktop background Firewa
403. rough the USB1 slot USB1 Blinking The Device is sending receiving data to from the USB device connected to it off The Device does not detect a USB connection through the USB1 slot VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device Table 1 LED Descriptions continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION e Green On The Device recognizes a USB connection through the USB2 slot USB2 Blinking The Device is sending receiving data to from the USB device connected to it Off The Device does not detect a USB connection through the USB2 slot 1 6 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the Web Configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234 1 Make sure the PWR SYS LED is on not blinking 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the PWR SYS LED begins to blink and then release it When the PWR SYS LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the device restarts 1 7 Wireless Access The Device is a wireless Access Point AP for wireless clients such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPads It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables
404. rowse the Internet and download files VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1 4 2 Device s USB Support The USB port of the Device is used for file sharing media server and printer sharing File Sharing Use the built in USB 2 0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive B You can connect one USB hard drive to the Device at a time Use FTP to access the files on the USB device Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application Media Server You can also use the Device as a media server This lets anyone on your network play video music and photos from a USB device B connected to the Device s USB port without having to copy them to another computer Figure 3 USB Media Server Application C music photo zu de ee Mm M Qo video B 70 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device Printer Server The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP IP port on the computers connected to your network Figure 4 Sharing a USB Printer 1 5 LEDs Lights The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs Figure 5 LEDs on the Device i nu 2 2 O 0 09 s ull ull GQ t9 None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not receiving power Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green
405. rsion of POP3 that runs over SSL PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login ROADRUNNER TCP UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix F Services Table 171 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface
406. rts with a 2 or 3 Unspecified Address An unspecified address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address It is similar to 0 0 0 0 in IPv4 Loopback Address A loopback address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or 1 allows a host to send packets to itself It is similar to 127 0 0 1 in IPv4 Multicast Address In IPv6 multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6 A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00 8 The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses Table 169 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local node FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local node FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local connected link FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local connected link FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local site FF05 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 All DHCP severs on a local site The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group Table 170 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF03 0
407. rval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon it includes with it a beacon interval This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon This value can be set from 50ms to 1000ms A high value helps save current consumption of the access point Advertisement DTIM Interval Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network This value can be set from 1 to 255 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b Only to allow only IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device Select 802 11g Only to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device Select 802 11n Only to allow only IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device Select 802 11b g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802 11b or IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced Select 802 11b g n Mixed to allow IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g or IEEE802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced 802 11 Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mix
408. rward packets to their destinations If you want to use the gateway IP address select Enable Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway Address Use Interface Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 8 Routing 8 3 The DNS Route Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device Click Network Setting gt Routing gt DNS Route to open the following screen Figure 68 Network Setting gt Routing gt DNS Route Add new DNS Route B Note Maximum of 20 entries could be added The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Network Setting gt Routing gt DNS Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new DNS Click this to add a new DNS route Route This is the index number of a DNS route Domain Name This is the host name or domain name of the DNS route entry Interface This is the WAN connection through which the Device forwards DNS requests for this domain name Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask of the DNS route entry Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the DNS route Click the Delete icon to delete the DNS route 8 3 1 The DNS Route Add Screen You can manually add the Device s DNS route entry Click Add new DNS Route in the Network Setting
409. rwarding to open the following screen Figure 70 Network Setting gt Routing gt Policy Forwarding Add new Policy Forward Rule ADSL B Note You need to add WAN Interface first The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Network Setting gt Routing gt Policy Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Policy Forward Rule Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule This is the index number of the entry Policy Name This is the name of the rule Source IP This is the source IP address Source Subnet his is the source subnet mask address Mask Protocol This is the transport layer protocol Source Port This is the source port number VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 8 Routing Table 43 Network Setting gt Routing gt Policy Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this policy Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the Device A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the policy 8 4 1 Add Edit Policy Forwarding Click Add new Policy Forward Rule in the Policy Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route Figure 71 Policy Forwarding Add Edit Policy Name
410. s 200 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 31 Remote Management 31 4 The Add Trust Domain Screen Use this screen to configure a public IP address which is allowed to access the Device Click the Add Trust Domain button in the Maintenance Remote MGMT Turst Domain screen to open the following screen Figure 170 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Trust Domain gt Add Trust Domain Enter the IP address of the management station permitted to access the local management services and click Apply IPv4 Address prefix length The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 140 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Trust Domain gt Add Trust Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 Address Enter a public IPv4 IP address which is allowed to access the service on the Device from the WAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 201 Chapter 31 Remote Management VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 32 1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the Device s TR 069 auto configuration settings 32 2 The TR 069 Client Screen TR 069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment CPE for example your Device can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server ACS TR 069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls RPCs between an ACS and a client de
411. s IGMP Mode DHCP Server State DHCP IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address Ending IP Address Auto reserve IP for the same host DHCP Server Lease Time 1 Days 0 DNS Values DNS DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 LAN IPV6 Mode Setup IPv6 State Default v 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 V Enable IGMP Snooping standard Mode O Blocking Mode LAN IPv6 Address Setup Opelegate prefix from WAN static OULA Pseudo Random Global ID ULA IPv6 Address Setup IPv6 Address Prefix Length MLD Snooping Status Enable MLD Snooping Enable O Disable O DHCP Relay LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup Stateless v LAN IPv6 DNS Assign Setup From DHCPv6 Server v 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 254 DHCPv6 Configuration DHCPv6 State Enable DHCPv6 Server Hours 0 Minutes IPv6 Router Advertisement State RADVD State Enable O Dynamic Static From ISP None IPv6 DNS Values IPv6 DNS Server 1 From ISP v IPv6 DNS Server 2 From ISP v IPv6 DNS Server 3 From ISP v DNS Query Scenario IPVAIIPV6 DNS Server v enable ODisabled Apply Cancel The following ta ble describes the fields in this screen Table 30 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Group Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings See Chapter 12 on page 177 for how to create a new interface group LAN IP Setup
412. s PROXY 1 PROXY 2 H E SIP SIP SIP amp RTP The following table shows the SIP call progression Table 120 SIP Call Progression UA 1 PROXY 1 PROXY 2 UA2 Invite Invite 4 4 100 Trying Invite 44 100 Trying 4 180 Ringing 44 180 Ringing 4 180 Ringing 4 2000K 4 2000K 4 2000K ACK pu X RTP 4 RTP BYE 2000K 1 User Agent 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 1 This message is an invitation to User Agent 2 to participate in a SIP telephone call Proxy 1 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request 2 Proxy 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 2 Proxy 2 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request 3 Proxy 2 sends a SIP INVITE request to User Agent 2 4 User Agent 2 sends a response back to Proxy 2 indicating that the phone is ringing The response is relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 255 Chapter 21 Voice User Agent 2 sends an OK response to Proxy 2 after the call is answered This is also relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1 User Agent 1
413. s is the index number of the address mapping set Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is blank for One to One mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for the Many to One mapping type Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is blank for One to One and Many to One mapping types Type Modify This is the address mapping type One to One This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type Many to One This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation the Device s Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only Many to Many This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you ta
414. s the name of the service used to forward the route Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded brx indicates a LAN interface where x can be 0 3 to represent LAN1 to LAN4 respectively ptm0O indicates a WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode pppO indicates a WAN interface using PPPoE VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 27 IGMP MLD Status 27 1 Overview Use the IGMP Status screens to look at IGMP MLD group status and traffic statistics 27 2 The IGMP MLD Group Status Screen Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the Device has joined and which ports have joined it To open this screen click System Monitor gt I GMP MLD Group Status Figure 164 System Monitor gt IGMP MLD Group Status The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is a communication protocol which can be used for more efficient use of online streaming video This page shows the status of IGMP The Multicast Listener Discovery MLD is a communication protocol for IPv6 which can be used for more efficient use of online streaming video This page shows the status of MLD The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 134 System Monitor gt IGMP MLD Group Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This field displays the name of an interface on the Device that belongs to an IGMP or MLD multicast group Multicast Group This field displays the name of the
415. screen to view detailed information for each incoming call Incoming from someone calling you Line Test This screen is only available for supervisors Use this screen to do various tests for a phone line System Monitor Log System Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the Device You can export or e mail the logs Use this screen to view the login record of the Device You can export or e mail the logs Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the Device LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the Device NAT Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts VoIP Status Use this screen to view VoIP registration current call statust and phone numbers for the phone ports ARP Table Use this screen to view the ARP table It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection Routing Table Use this screen to view the routing table on the Device IGMP MLD Group Status Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the Device xDSL Statistics Use this screen to view the Device s xDSL traffic statistics 3G Statistics Use this screen to look at 3G Internet connection status Maintenance VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table3 Navigation Panel Summary continued
416. ser s Guide Quick Start 3 1 Overview Use the Quick Start screens to configure the Device s time zone basic Internet access and wireless settings Note See the technical reference chapters starting on page 35 for background information on the features in this chapter 3 2 Quick Start Setup 1 The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login Or you can click the Click Start icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens Select the time zone of the Device s location and click Next Figure 12 Time Zone Quick Start x Welcome to Quick Start wizard Step t of 3 The wizard will guide you through the basic settings of this device This will take about few minutes to complete Click Next te begin Time Zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time Iv Dont automatically show this Quick Start after login Er VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Quick Start 2 Enter your Internet connection information in this screen The screen and fields to enter may vary depending on your current connection type Click Next Click Next Figure 13 Internet Connection Quick Start x Internet Connection Step 2 of3 The current connection type is setto PPPoEand needs a user name and password to get online User Name Password 000900000000000000 9 Is there specific IP address information from your Internet Service Provider ISP C Yes No Then the IP Address infor
417. ser s Guide 273 Chapter 24 VoIP Status 274 Table 131 System Monitor gt VoIP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Message This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for the SIP account Waiting Last Incoming Number This field displays the last number that called the SIP account The field is blank if no number has ever dialed the SIP account Last Outgoing This field displays the last number the SIP account called The field is blank if the SIP Number account has never dialed a number Call Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the Device Duration This field displays how long the current call has lasted Status This field displays the current state of the phone call Idle There are no current VoIP calls incoming calls or outgoing calls being made Dial The callee s phone is ringing Ring The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call Process There is a VoIP call in progress DI SC The callee s line is busy the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook Codec This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VolP call through a phone port Peer Number This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port Phone Status Phone This field displays the name of a phone port on the Device Outgoing This field displays the SIP number
418. ser s Guide 315 Chapter 40 Diagnostic 40 3 Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup Use this screen to ping traceroute or nslookup an IP address Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup to open the screen shown next Figure 190 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup Ping TraceRoute Test Info TCP IP Address URL or IPv4 IPv6 Address Ping Trace Route Nstookup The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 150 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup LABEL DESCRIPTION URL or IP Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping traceroute or nslookup in Address order to test a connection Ping Click this to ping the IP address that you entered TraceRoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer Nslookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 40 Diagnostic 40 4 802 1ag Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 8 2 1ag to open the following screen Use this screen to perform CFM actions Figure 191 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 802 1ag 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Domain MD Level BE Destination MAC Address 802 1Q VLAN ID 0 4095 0 VDSL Traffic
419. ses either through router advertisements or through DHCPv6 LAN IPv6 DNS Select how the Device provide DNS server and domain name information to the clients From Router Advertisement The Device provides DNS information through router advertisements From DHCPv6 Server The Device provides DNS information through DHCPv6 From RA amp DHCPv6 Server The Device provides DNS information through both router advertisements and DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Configuration DHCPv6 State This shows the status of the DHCPv6 IPv6 Router Advertisement State RADVD State This shows whether RADVD is enabled or not IPv6 DNS Values IPv6 DNS Select From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information Server 1 3 Select User Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server IPv6 addresses the Device passes to the DHCP clients Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers DNS Query Select how the Device handles clients DNS information requests Scenario Pv4 IPv6 DNS Server The Device forwards the requests to both the IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers and sends clients the first DNS information it receives Pv6 DNS Server Only The Device forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server and sends clients the DNS information it receives 1Pv4 DNS Server Only The Device forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server and sends clients the DNS information it receives
420. ses wireless LANs in depth For more information see Appendix D on page 367 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 10 1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients access points and bridges A wireless client is a radio connected to a user s computer An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients extending a network s range Traditionally a wireless network operates in one of two ways An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients The wireless clients connect to the access points An ad hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 47 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B use the access point AP to interact with the other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your Device is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands
421. setting is used Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Device sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Operation Select Passive to have the Device update the routing table based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface Select Active to have the Device advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 8 Routing VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Quality of Service QoS 9 1 Overview Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand Configure QoS on the Device to group and prioritize applicatio
422. sion rate Section 5 6 on page 63 Table 5 WAN Setup Overview LAYER 2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION DSL LINK CONNECTION TYPE MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS ADSL VDSL N A Routing PPPoE PPP information IPv4 IPv6 IP over PTM address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU PoE IPv4 IPv6 IP address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU Bridge N A VLAN and QoS ADSL over ATM EoA Routing PPPoE PPPOA ATM PVC configuration PPP information IPv4 IPv6 IP address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU IPoE IPoA ATM PVC configuration IPv4 IPv6 IP address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU Bridge N A ATM PVC configuration and QoS EtherWAN N A Routing PPPoE PPP user name and password WAN IPv4 IPv6 IP address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU IPOE WAN IPv4 IPv6 IP address NAT DNS server and routing feature Bridge N A VLAN and QoS 5 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet they should also provide a username and password and service name
423. smission rate allowed for traffic on this connection Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving If you select ADSL over ATM as the interface type the following screen appears Figure 25 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit ADSL over ATM Bridge Mode General Active O Name Type ADSLoverATM Ef Mode Bridge ATM PVC Configuration VPI 0 255 lo VCI 32 65535 33 DSL Link Type Ea m Encapsulation Mode LLC SNAP BRIDGING Service Category Non Realtime VBR QoS Rate Limit Peak Cell Rate cells s Sustainable Cell Rate cells s Maximum Burst Size cells kbps Appiy cancei The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 9 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit ADSL over ATM Bridge Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select ADSL over ATM as the interface for which you want to configure here The Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 9 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit ADSL over ATM Bridge Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you mo
424. ssions Use this screen to configure the maximum number of NAT sessions each client host is allowed to have through the Device DNS DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address Interface Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group Group USB Service File Sharing Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device Media Server Use this screen to use the Device as a media server Printer Server Use this screen to enable the print server on the Device and get the model name of the associated printer Power Power This screen is only available for supervisors Use this screen to Management Management manually turn on off specific interface s and or all LEDs immediately Auto Switch Off This screen is only available for supervisors Use this screen to configure schedules to have the Device automatically turn on off specific interface s and or all LEDs Security Settings Firewall General Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall Protocol Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service DoS attacks MAC Filter Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC addresses to the
425. st of this document After you click Status on the Connection Status page the Status screen is displayed See Chapter 4 on page 38 for more information about the Status screen If you click Virtual Device on the StatusSystem I nfo screen a visual graphic appears showing the connection status of the Device s ports The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray Figure 11 Virtual Device Virtual Device Eon 20 Seconds v 28 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2 2 3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features The following tables describe each menu item Table3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Connection Status This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers devices connected to it Network Setting Broadband Broadband Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters WAN IP address assignment and other advanced properties You can also add new WAN connections 3G Backup Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection Advanced Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL Annex M Annex J and DSL PhyR functions 802 1x Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802 1x settings on the Device Wan Status Use this screen to view historical traffic transmission statistics of a WAN interface Wireless General Use this scre
426. stance 20cm between the radiator and your body National Communications Commission NCC Article 12 Without permission any company firm or user shall not alter the frequency increase the power or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication if an interference is found the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists Industry Canada IC CAN ICES 3 B NMB 3 B This device complies with RSS 210 of the Industry Canada Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR 192 d Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes 1 le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage pr judiciable et 2 ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage recu y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement ind sirable IMPORTANT NOTE Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies w
427. sword must contain 6 to 256 characters include 0 9 and a z New Password ay Verify New Password x 5 The Quick Start Wizard screen appears You can configure the Device s time zone basic Internet access and wireless settings See for more information 6 After you finished or closed the Quick Start Wizard screen the Network Map page appears Figure 9 Network Map ZyXEL VMG8924 B10A Enoisn v ME E amp Logout Network Map Viewing mode EL Mi 20 Seconds v Internet VMG8924 B10A Check the problems e VMG8924 B10A c Connection Status 7 Click Status to display the Status screen where you can view the Device s interface and system information EB VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2 2 Web Configurator Layout Figure 10 Screen Layout P4 VMG8924 B10A Enoisn v ATE amp Logout Status LOGICHNUCUTH 20 Seconds v Device information System Status Host Name Router System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 26 minutes Model Number VMG8924 B10A Current Date Time 01 Jan 2013 01 47 19 Firmware Version 1 00 AAKL 0 b2 System Resource WAN formation CPU Usage B wA 313 LAN Information IPv4 Address 192 168 1 1 Memory Usage S IPv4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 NAT Session Usage o DHCP Server MAC Address EC 43 F6 44 6C 97 2 4G WLAN Information MAC Address EC 43 F6 44 6C 98 Status Off Interface Status Rate SSID ZyXEL446C9
428. t A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients When a client cannot use its link local address and a well known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification remote ID option and the interface ID option to the Relay Forward DHCPv6 messages The remote ID option carries a user defined string such as the system name The interface ID option provides slot number port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server The remote ID option if any is stripped from the Relay Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients The DHCP server copies the interface ID option from the Relay Forward message into the Relay Reply message and sends it to the relay agent The interface ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts Prefix Delegation ICMPv6 Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The Device uses the received IPv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Through sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by multicast the Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts then can use the prefix to generat
429. t Integrity Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data Choices are MD5 and Algorithm SHA1 SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5 but it is also slower VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Table 103 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS Select whether or not you want to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS PFS changes the root key that is used to generate encryption keys for each IPSec SA The longer the key the more secure the encryption but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information Both routers must use the same DH key group Choices are None do not use any random number 768bit DH Group1 use a 768 bit random number 1024bit DH Group2 use a 1024 bit random number 1536bit DH Group5 use a 1536 bit random number 2048bit DH Group14 use a 2048 bit random number 3072bit DH Group15 use a 3072 bit random number 4096bit DH Group16 use a 4096 bit random number Key Life Time Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected The following fields are available if you select Manual in the Key Exchange Method field
430. t additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UI C ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device IGD 1 0 See Section 7 5 on page 113 for examples of installing and using UPnP Finding Out More See Section 7 12 on page 126 for technical background information on LANs 7 1 3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen 7 2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device Click Network Setting Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings 1 Enter an IP address into the I P Address field The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation This will become the IP address of your Device 2 Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 107 Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Click Apply to save your settings Figure 55 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup Interface Group Group Name LAN IP Setup IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Prefix Length IGMP Snooping Statu
431. t can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Routing 8 1 Overview The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the Device s LAN interface The Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Device s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN Figure 65 Example of Routing Topology VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 8 Routing 8 2 The Routing Screen Use this screen to view and config
432. ted to the network Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting 372 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This se
433. tem Log screen to see the system logs Click System Monitor Log to open the System Log screen Figure 156 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log Level Emergency Category All ClearLog Refresh ExportLog Email Log Now The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 126 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log Email Log Now LABEL DESCRIPTION Level Select a severity level from the drop down list box This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected When you select a severity the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher Category Select the type of logs to display Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Export Log Click this to export the selected log s Click this to send the log file s to the E mail address you specify in the Maintenance gt Logs Setting screen System Log This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Messages This field states the reason for the log VMG8924 B10A User s
434. tenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Radiation Exposure Statement This device and its antenna s must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter For operation within 5 15 5 25GHz frequency range it is restricted to indoor environment IEEE 802 11b 802 11g or 802 11n 20MHz operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channel 1 through 11 IEEE 802 11n 40MHz operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channel 3 through 9 This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CEO The device complies with the essential requirements of the R amp TTE Directive 1995 5 EC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with EU radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum di
435. tent Remote ID Type Remote ID Content Advanced IKE Settings NAT Traversal Phase 1 Mode Encryption Algorithm Integrity Algorithm Select Diffie Hellman Group for Key Exchange Key Life Time Phase 2 Encryption Algorithm Integrity Algorithm Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS Key Life Time new_connection 0 0 0 0 Subnet v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Subnet v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 ESP Auto IKE Pre Shared Key v Disable v Main M 3DES v MD5 v 1024bit DH Group 2 3600 3DES v MD5 1024bit DH Group 2 3600 v Seconds v Seconds This screen contains the following fields Table 103 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit Cancel LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select this to activate this VPN policy IPSec Connection Name Enter the name of the VPN policy Remote IPSec Gateway Address Enter the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA Tunnel access from local IP addresses Select Single Address to have only one local LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel Select Subnet to specify local LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 20 VPN Table 103 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address for VPN If Single Address is selected enter a static IP address on the LAN behind your Device If Subnet is selected specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by
436. terface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Packets Received Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface more hide Click more to show more information Click hide more to hide them more Disabled This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected Interface Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Packets Received Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface 270 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 23 Traffic Status 23 3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN to open the following screen The figure in this screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the Device Figure 159 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt
437. that you use to make calls on this phone port Number Incoming This field displays the SIP number that you use to receive calls on this phone port Number VMG8924 B10A User s Guide ARP Table 25 1 Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 25 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device the device s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the device puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back
438. the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen Use this screen to view your Device s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules Click Network Setting Wireless MAC Authentication The screen appears as shown Figure 40 Wireless gt MAC Authentication General SSID MAC Restrict Mode MAC address List Add new MAC address ZyXEL446C97 v Gpisabled O Allow O Deny B Notes Note If mode of first SSID allow is choosed and MAC list is empty WPS will be disabled The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Wireless gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID MAC Restrict Mode Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering Select Deny to block access to the Device MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the Device Select Allow to permit access to the Device MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device Add new MAC address Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device in these address fields Enter the MAC addr
439. the Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection This type of encryption while robust is not as strong as WPA WPA2 or even WPA2 PSK The WPA2 PSK security mode is a newer more robust version of the WPA encryption standard It offers slightly better security although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be Click Network Setting gt Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 36 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK Security Level More Secure Recommended e 4 o bM v v v Security Mode apa2 PSK IY Generate password automatically Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z 0 9 and other characters are not allowed Password N A less WPA PSK Compatible C Enable Disable Encyption TKIP 4eS m Group Key Update Timer 1800 sec The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 PSK data encryption Security Mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the drop down list box Generate Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password The password field password will not be configurable when you select this option automatically Password
440. the Device should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call is unanswered Enable Do Not Disturb Select this to set your phone to not ring when someone calls you Enable Anonymous Call Block Select this if you do not want the phone to ring when someone tries to call you with caller ID deactivated Enable Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS When you make a phone call but hear a busy tone Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS allows you to enable auto callback by pressing 5 and hanging up the phone The Device then tries to call that phone number every minute since after you hang up the phone When the called party becomes available within the CCBS timeout period 60 minutes by default both phones ring Ifthe called party s phone rings because of CCBS but no one answers the phone after 180 seconds you will hear a busy tone You can enable CCBS on the called number again e Ifyou manually call the number on which you have enabled CCBS before the CCBS timeout period expires the Device disables CCBS on the called number f you call a second number before the first called number s CCBS timeout period expires the Device stops calling the first number until you finish the second call Select this option to activate CCBS on the Device MWI Message Waiting Indication Select this if you want to hear a waiting beeping dial tone on your phone when you have at least one
441. the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action 10 7 1 Add Edit Address Mapping Rule To add or edit an address mapping rule click Add new rule or the rule s edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next Figure 92 Address Mapping Add Edit Type One to One Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP set 3 ox canca The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 65 Address Mapping Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Choose the IP port mapping type from one of the following One to One This mode maps one local I P address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type Many to One This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation the Device s Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only Many to Many This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Local Start IP Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the
442. the calls were made Total Calls This displays the total number of calls from or to your SIP numbers that day Outgoing Calls This displays how many calls originated from you that day Incoming Calls This displays how many calls you received that day Missing Calls This displays how many incoming calls were not answered that day Total Duration This displays how long all calls lasted that day 21 8 The Call History Outgoing Calls Screen Use this screen to see detailed information for each outgoing call you made Click Vol P gt Call History gt Call History Outgoing The following screen displays Figure 149 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Outgoing Refresh Clear All Each field is described in the following table Table 117 VolP gt Call History gt Call History Outgoing LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the dialed call list Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the dialed call list This is a read only index number time This is the date and time when the call was made phone port This is the phone port on which you made the call phone number This is the SIP number you called duration This displays how long the call lasted 21 9 The Call History Incoming Calls Screen Use this screen to see detailed information for each incoming call from someone calling you VMG8924 B10A User s Guide EJ Chapter 21 Voice
443. the default values nd Por To enter one port number enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields To enter a range of ports enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field SRTP Support SRTP Support When you make a VolP call using SIP the Real time Transport Protocol RTP is used to handle voice data transfer The Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP is a security profile of RTP It is designed to provide encryption and authentication for the RTP data in both unicast and multicast applications The Device supports encryption using AES with a 128 bit key To protect data integrity SRTP uses a Hash based Message Authentication Code HMAC calculation with Secure Hash Algorithm SHA 1 to authenticate data HMAC SHA 1 produces a 80 or 32 bit authentication tag that is appended to the packet Both the caller and callee should use the same algorithms to establish an SRTP session Crypto Suite Select the encryption and authentication algorithm set used by the Device to set up an SRTP media session with the peer device Select AES CM 128 HMAC SHA1 80 or AES CM 128 HMAC SHAI 32 to enable both data encryption and authentication for voice data Select AES CM 128 NULL to use 128 bit data encryption but disable data authentication Select NULL CIPHER HMAC SHATI1 80 to disable encryption but require authent
444. ther enter the client s PIN in the AP or enter the AP s PIN in the client it does not matter which 6 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 50 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL B amup 5 SSID WPA 2 PSK 7 COMMUNICATION N C Se amp wri 6 10 9 3 How WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is used depends on the standards supported b
445. ther the client is connected to the Device MAC Address IP Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry the following screen displays Figure 57 Static DHCP Add Edit Active Group Name Select Device Info MAC Address IP Address Default Manual Input Apply Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Static DHCP Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate the connection between the client and the Device Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings See Chapter 12 on page 177 for how to create a new inter
446. this field IP Addressing This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field Values Beginning IP This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Address Ending IP This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Address Auto reserve IP for the same host Select Enable to have the Device record DHCP IP addresses with the MAC addresses the IP addresses are assigned to The Device assigns the same IP address to the same MAC address when the host requests an IP address again through DHCP DHCP Server This is the period of time DHCP assigned addresses is used DHCP automatically assigns IP Lease Time addresses to clients when they log in DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program DHCP leases addresses for a period of time which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field Days Hours Enter the lease time of the DHCP server Minutes DNS Values This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider Select Dynamic if you have the Dynamic DNS service Select Static if you have the Static DNS service DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2
447. tificate You can choose a local certificate used by TR 069 client The local certificate should be used by TR 069 imported in the Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates screen client Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide TR 064 33 1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the Device s TR 064 auto configuration settings 33 2 The TR 064 Screen TR 064 is a LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum TR 064 is built on top of UPnP It allows the users to use a TR 064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user specific parameters such as the username and password Click Maintenance TR 064 to open the following screen Figure 172 Maintenance gt TR 064 Enable Disable The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 142 Maintenance gt TR 064 LABEL DESCRIPTION State Select Enable to activate management via TR 064 on the LAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 33 TR 064 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide SNMP 34 1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the SNMP settings on the Device 34 2 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol
448. timedia traffic such as voice or video Impulse noise protection INP provides a buffer to allow for correction of errors caused by error correction to deal with this The number of DMT Discrete Multi Tone symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and downstream traffic A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability but it causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia data Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation measured in decibels dB This attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near end and the power received at the far end Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics wire gauge quality condition and length of the physical line Attainable Net Data Rate These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic xDSL Counters VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 28 xDSL Statistics Table 135 Status gt xDSL Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider FEC This is the number of Far End
449. tion 0 0 dB 1 3 dB Attainable Net Data Rate 9 133 532 Mbps VDSL Band Status U3 Dl D2 D3 Line Attenuation dB 0 0 0 0 N 0 5 ll 2 4 Signal Attenuation dB 0 0 0 0 N 0 5 Lol 2 4 SNR Margin dB 21 0 1 0 N 22 6 22 6 22 8 Transmit Power dBm 15 6 4 4 0 6 N a 6 6 6 0 7 0 VDSL Counters Downstream Upstream Since Link time 59 min 47 sec FEC 188 0 CRC 0 0 ES 0 0 SES UAS 0 LOS 0 LOF 0 0 0 E MTM a a db VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 28 xDSL Statistics bras ee Le M EQ VDSL Counters Downstream Upstream Since Link time 59 min 47 sec FEC 188 0 CRC 0 0 ES 0 0 SES 0 0 UAS 0 0 LO 0 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 Latest 15 minutes time l6 sec FEC CRC 0 0 ES 0 SES 0 0 UAS LOS 0 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 0 Previous 15 minutes time 15 min 0 sec FEC 0 0 CRC ES 0 0 SES 0 UAS 0 LOS LOF 0 LOM Latest 1 day time 16 hours 16 sec FEC 188 0 CRC 0 0 ES 0 SES 0 0 UAS 28 28 LOS 0 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 0 Previous 1 day time 0 sec FEC 0 0 CRC 0 0 ES 0 0 SES 0 0 UAS 0 LOS 0 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 Previous 15 minutes time 15 min 0 sec FEC 0 0 CRC 0 0 ES 0 SES 0 UAS 0 0 LOS 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 Latest 1 day time 16 hours 16 sec FEC 188 0 CRC 0 0 E3 0 0 SES UAS 28 28 LOS LOF 0 LOM Previous 1 day time 0 sec VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Ch
450. tion sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the Device s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2f 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2 0 Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 la2f 15 IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband VMG8924 B1
451. tion to Client 2 Figure 53 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE vet CLIENT 2 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead Figure 54 WPS Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR ENROLLEE 6 10 9 5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generated WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registr
452. to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug and Play UPnP SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNI X server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems VDOLIVE TCP 7000 A videoconferencing solution The UDP port number is specified in the application UDP user defined VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2013 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of th
453. tted Information Rate CIR and two burst sizes the Committed Burst Size CBS and Excess Burst Size EBS The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets CBS and EBS Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate called Committed Information Rate CIR When the first bucket CBS is full new tokens overflow into the second bucket EBS All packets are evaluated against the CBS If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM A packet arrives The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet in bytes After a packet is transmitted a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket the Device checks the EBS bucket The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket Otherwise the packet is marked red No tokens are removed if the packet is dro
454. ture VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 27 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Others continued LABEL DESCRIPTION OBSS Coexistence Select Enable to allow the coexistence of 20 MHz and 40 MHz Overlapping Basic Service Sets OBSS in wireless local area networks Select Disabled to disable this feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 9 The Channel Status Screen Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Click Network Setting Wireless Channel Status The screen appears as shown Click Scan to scan the wireless LAN channels You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section The Time for last scan field shows how long ago this screen was updated Figure 46 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Channel Status B Note B notes Channel Monitor Scan Wireless LAN Channels Ittakes about 15 seconds to scan the wireless channels Channel Scan Result Channel Noise B Time for last scan 29 mins ago The value of Channel Noise is not an absolute value but a relative value so there is always a channel getting Channel Noise with 100 lli Current WLAN Channel Channel Noise 100 4 86 49 50 45 1 2 40 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 6 Channel NO m 6 10 Technical Reference This section discus
455. u would set the day to First Sunday the month to November and the time to 2 in the Hour field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would set the day to Last Sunday and the month to October The time you select in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 35 Time Settings Table 144 Maintenance Time continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 35 Time Settings VMG8924 B10A User s Guide E mail Notification 36 1 Overview A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive forward and deliver e mail messages To have the Device send reports logs or notifications via e mail you must specify an e mail server and the e mail addresses of the sender and receiver 36 2 The Email Notification Screen Click Maintenance Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen Use this screen to view remove and add mail server information on the Device Figure 176 Maintenance gt Ema
456. ul EE oa dad cta cid E Roa ka aad e Eod 233 21 1 2 What You Need to Know About VolP incite ticeec me enea EEE EENE 234 APAS YO EON E E AE A A A E A A E A A aa CES RR 234 210 The SIP FUE Sreo caruso i bleed lesan bande ente Eo te ees 234 21 91 The SIF Account Add Edi GOIBBIM 6sssisieiscd iniu saat cons dI tei ses ete tired ua ence es Eo ON ERN 235 21 4 The SIP Service Provider Screen ccesccscceccccceecessseeseaecaececcececeecesseecsessaaseaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaaeeas 239 21411 The SIP Service Provider Add Edit Doreen Lettre tei nenied A indiana 240 212 Dis Pla eS assoni o a e DREUR EURO REN pO o ea E ERE REL Mama POR d o 246 So The MOE GU GB neoa exon D VIPON Od xcd dnas OG bump X KI IRR E a E END RS a FREUE 247 ex cd qe NS oed UE D o D I 247 ZLT he Call Histon Somma SO BB Lud ce arbe ir paa cre Edu tua ap eq t ar b d DU matte M QURE 248 21 8 The Cal History Outgoing Calls SIEG occu tete prt Alei peVd dant nea aeu du peo aa rx Findet dicat hos 249 212 THE Call Ristory incoming Calls SOROS EE 249 ELO Techi ca RELEE sas ntsc arcisued san Ea tbc kae se sax cubano lardo E Ee PDA ER 250 LO COUT Senice AS t cae ac EENS EE 258 21 2 Phone Sernvicas QUORIBW 2 Lobos di Go REED denne ad even nated SS IRR EROR 258 Chapter 22 P E a E ee 265 ee EEE eyo MES I UU LIE UE UST 265 221 3 What You Gan Do in this Chaplet do oe cc acest Esos uu hecha eater xe o tan iced ule a 265 25 1 2 What YouMbed To KION ai soi eec oone aate Eae Da a
457. un IPv4 only Select IPv6 I Pv4 DualStack to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time Select IPv6 Only if you want the Device to run IPv6 only ATM PVC Configuration These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you DSL Link Type This field is not editable The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field EoA Ethernet over ATM uses an Ethernet header in the packet so that you can have multiple services connections over one PVC You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services EoA supports ENET ENCAP IPoE PPPoE and RFC1483 2684 bridging encapsulation methods PPPoA PPP over ATM allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC I PoA IP over ATM allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC Encapsulation Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices Mode are e LLC SNAP BRIDGING In LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header This is available only when you select I POE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field e VC MUX In VC multiplexing ea
458. ur Computer s IP Address Click OK when finished Figure 202 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es f you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address yon have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them Figure 203 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window 9 Click Close OK in Windows 2000 NT to close the Local Area Connection P
459. uration interface Use the PIN method instead of the push button configuration PBC method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method When you use the PIN method you must enter the PIN from one device usually the wireless client into the second device usually the Access Point or wireless router Then when WPS is activated on the first device it presents its PIN to the second device If the PIN matches one device sends the network and security information to the other allowing it to join the network Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router referred to here as the AP and a client device using the PIN method 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices 2 Access the WPS section of the AP s configuration interface See the device s User s Guide for how to do this 3 Look for the client s WPS PIN it will be displayed either on the device or in the WPS section of the client s configuration interface see the device s User s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN for the Device see Section 6 5 on page 85 4 Enter the client s PIN in the AP s configuration interface 5 If the client device s configuration interface has an area for entering another device s PIN you can ei
460. ure the static route rules on the Device Click Network Setting gt Routing gt Static Route to open the following screen Figure 66 Network Setting gt Routing gt Static Route Add new static route 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 32 ADSL The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Network Setting gt Routing gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new static route Click this to configure a new static route This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the static route is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Interface This is the WAN interface used for this static route Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the Device Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the Device A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to d
461. urity protocol Use this security option for maximum protection of your network However it is the least backwards compatible with older devices The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2 It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices Click Network Setting gt Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list Figure 37 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 Security Level More Secure Recommended A LJ v v v Security Mode WPA2 M Authentication Server IPv4 Address 0 0 0 0 Port Number 1812 Shared Secret 99999999990909099090909 9 password unmask less WPA Compatible O Enable Disable Encyption TKIP AES WPA2 Pre authentication Enable Disable Network Re auth Interval 36000 sec Group Key Update Timer 1800 sec The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 PSK data encryption Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop down list box VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 19 Wireless gt General More Secure W
462. use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your Device but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 127 Chapter 7 Home Networking You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or i
463. ut VoIP VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP IP is the Internet Protocol which is the message carrying standard the Internet runs on So Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals speech over the Internet or another network that uses the Internet Protocol SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device like a computer or the Device send messages to another In VoIP these messages are about phone calls over the network For example when you dial a number on your Device it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device the number you dialed to take part in the call SIP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VolP account It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet When you set the Device to use your SIP account to make calls the Device is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet Strictly speaking you don t need a SIP account It is possible for one SIP device like the Device to call another without involving a SIP service provider However the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to
464. vice RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language XML format over HTTP or HTTPS An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the Device modify settings perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password Click Maintenance gt TR 069 Client to open the following screen Use this screen to configure your Device to be managed by an ACS Figure 171 Maintenance gt TR 069 Client TR 069 Client Inform Inform Interval ACS URL ACS User Name ACS Password WAN Interface used by TR 069 client ADSL LIvost LIETHWAN Llpppo3G Display SOAP messages on serial console Connection Request Authentication Connection Request User Name Connection Request Password Connection Request URL Local certificate used by TR 069 client O Enable Disable 300 admin 229 Oany_WAN Multi WAN O Enable Disable admin Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 32 TR 069 Client The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 141 Maintenance gt TR 069 Client LABEL DESCRIPTION Inform Select Enable for the Device to send periodic inform via TR 069 on the WAN Otherwise select Disable Inform Interval Enter the time interval in seconds at which the Device sends information to th
465. vice is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server s The Device uses a system DNS server in the order you specify in the Broadband screen to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry After the Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 11 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DNS Entry screen to view configure or remove DNS routes Section 11 2 on page 174 Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure t
466. voice message Your VoIP service provider must support this feature Expiration Time Keep the default value for this field unless your VoIP service provider tells you to change it Enter the number of seconds the SIP server should provide the message waiting service each time the Device subscribes to the service Before this time passes the Device automatically subscribes again Hot Line Warm Line Enable Select this to enable the hot line or warm line feature on the Device VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 21 Voice Table 111 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Warm Line Select this to have the Device dial the specified warm line number after you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad for a period of time Hot Line Select this to have the Device dial the specified hot line number immediately when you pick up the telephone Hot Line Warm Line number Enter the number of the hot line or warm line that you want the Device to dial Warm Line Timer Enter a number of seconds that the Device waits before dialing the warm line number if you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad Enable Missed Select this option to have the Device e mail you a notification when there is a Call Email missed call Notification Mail Server Select a mail server for the e mail
467. w LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions Medium Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions High Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 15 3 The Protocol Screen You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority website See Appendix F on page 389 for some examples VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 197 Chapter 15 Firewall Click Security gt Firewall gt Protocol to display the following screen Figure 117 Security gt Firewall gt Protocol Add new service entry example Other 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Security gt Firewall gt Protocol LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Click this to add a new service service entry Name This is the name of your customized service Description This is the description of your customized service service uses another IP protocol Ports Protocol This shows the IP protocol TCP UDP ICMP or TCP UDP and the port number or range Number of ports that defines your customized service Other and the protocol number displays if the Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the entry
468. ware Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 38 Firmware Upgrade After you see the firmware updating screen wait two minutes before logging into the Device again Figure 181 Firmware Uploading ra Router is restarting now Please wait The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 182 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen Figure 183 Error Message Error x Q Image uploading failed The selected file is an illegal image VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Configuration 39 1 Overview The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default 39 2 The Configuration Screen Click Mainte
469. when editing an existing WAN interface Type the class vender ID you Murs want the Device to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP server DHCP This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface Type the vender specific option 43 information you want the Device to add in the DHCP Offer packets The information is used Enable for example for configuring an ACS s Auto Configuration Server URL Static IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Subnet Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Mask Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP Address VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Routing Feature This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6 IPv4 DualStack in the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection IGMP Proxy Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish Enable membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traff
470. y a NAT device The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table Table 106 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NAT AH Transport N AH Tunnel N ESP Transport Y ESP Tunnel Y Y This is supported in the Device if you enable NAT traversal 20 5 7 ID Type and Content With aggressive negotiation mode see Section 20 5 4 on page 229 the Device identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted This enables the Device to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses Regardless of the ID type and content configuration the Device does not allow you to save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses With main mode see Section 20 5 4 on page 229 the ID type and content are encrypted to provide identity protection In this case the Device can only distinguish between up to 12 different incoming SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses The Device can distinguish up to 48 incoming SAs because you can select between three encryption algorithms DES 3DES and AES two authentication algorithms MD5 and SHA1 and eight key groups when you configure a VPN rule see Section 20 2 on page 219 The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs VMG892
471. y of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn t match The VPN device at the receiving end doesn t know about the NAT in the middle so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet including headers in a new IP packet The new IP packet s source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end When using ESP protocol with authentication the packet contents in this case the entire original packet are encrypted The encrypted contents but not the new headers are signed with a hash value appended to the packet Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged by a NAT device Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT Table 105 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NAT AH Transport N AH Tunnel N ESP Transport N ESP Tunnel Y 20 5 6 VPN NAT and NAT Traversal NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet but a NAT devi
472. y screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit The screen shown next appears Figure 99 DNS Entry Add Edit Host Name IP Address Avot Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 DNS Entry Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 11 3 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your Device s DDNS Click Network Setting DNS Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown Figure 100 Network Setting gt DNS gt Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Service Provider Hostname Username Password Email Key Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled ww w DynDNS com Apply Cancel VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 175 Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 72 Network Setting gt DNS gt gt Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Select Enable to use dynamic DNS Service Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop down list box Provider Hostname Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma
473. y the devices If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point Figure 51 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES 7 WPS HANDSHAKE ENROLLEE SECURE TUNNEL Ay D SECURITY INFO P COMMUNICATION The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS enabled device has connect
474. your Device supports File Allocation Table FAT and FAT32 Common Internet File System The Device uses Common Internet File System CIFS protocol for its file sharing functions CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows Linux Samba and other operating systems refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility 13 1 2 2 About Printer Server Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices Operating System An operating system OS is the interface which helps you manage a computer Common examples are Microsoft Windows Mac OS or Linux TCP IP TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer such as a process run by your web browser When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Chapter 13 USB Service Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW port 9100 protocol The following OSs support Device s printer sharing feature M
475. your device Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately VMG8924 B10A User s Guide Index A ACK message 254 ACL rule 200 ACS 293 activation firewalls 197 media server 189 SIP ALG 165 SSID 81 Address Resolution Protocol 275 administrator password 26 AH 227 algorithms 227 alternative subnet mask notation 352 antenna directional 379 gain 378 omni directional 379 AP access point 369 applications Internet access 18 media server 188 activation 189 iTunes server 188 applications NAT 171 ARP Table 275 277 authentication 93 95 RADIUS server 95 Auto Configuration Server see ACS 293 backup configuration 311 Basic Service Set See BSS 367 Basic Service Set see BSS blinking LEDs 20 Broadband 43 Index broadcast 68 BSS 96 367 example 96 BYE request 254 C CA 211 373 call history 248 incoming calls 249 outgoing calls 249 call hold 260 261 call service mode 259 261 call transfer 260 262 call waiting 26
476. ype and Content Configuration Example DEVICE A DEVICE B Local ID type IP Local ID type IP Local ID content 1 1 1 10 Local ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID type E mail Remote ID type IP Remote ID content aa yahoo com Remote ID content 1 1 1 0 20 5 8 Pre Shared Key A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation see Section 20 5 3 on page 228 for more on IKE phases It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection 20 5 9 Diffie Hellman DH Key Groups Diffie Hellman DH is a public key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel Diffie Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys Upon completion of the Diffie Hellman exchange the two peers have a shared secret but the IKE SA is not authenticated For authentication use pre shared keys VMG8924 B10A User s Guide 21 1 Overview Use this chapter to Connect an analog phone to the Device Make phone calls over the Internet as well as the regular phone network Configure settings such as speed dial Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls 21 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your Device to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phon

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

接続設定ガイド  安全データシート - 林純薬 – 電子材料  www.pce-iberica.es  Manual - White Light  operation manual  ベーシックな抽出機構とパワフルなスチーマーを備えた普及モデル。  Microlife WatchBP Home A Navigation Manual  Texas Instruments TI-92 Calculator User Manual  Sony VAIO VPCCW27FX  model 820 series shallow mount plate barrier  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file